JP6763638B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a multifunction device (generally also referred to as a "parrot machine") in which a pachinko machine and a rotating cylinder type gaming machine are fused. It is a thing.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a gaming area in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a game. Multiple entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, accessory) that are allowed to accept game media in the area and give benefits according to the acceptance of the game medium It has a winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.). Then, when the game medium is accepted at the reception, benefits (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are given, so that the game medium is sent to the reception for the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game medium so that it can be accepted.

However, it has been difficult to further improve the convenience with the conventional game machine configuration as described in Patent Document 1.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-151706

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine of a new aspect.

The present invention
A storage unit that is provided in the upper part on the back side of the game machine and has a storage area that can store game balls supplied from the island facility.
A tank rail portion capable of guiding the game ball stored in the storage area toward the right side of the rear view of the game machine, and
In a game machine equipped with
A partition wall portion that partitions the upper opening of the storage area and
A non-reservoir area formed outside the upper opening partitioned by the partition wall,
Prepare
The non-storage area portion is formed on the right side of the partition wall portion, and is formed.
A specific inclined surface capable of guiding the game ball toward the tank rail portion is formed in the non-storage region portion so that the game ball located in the non-storage region portion can flow into the tank rail portion by a predetermined event. Being done
It is characterized by that.
Further, the following means will be disclosed for reference as an invention different from the present invention.
Means 1: In a game machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A frame-shaped front component that partitions the outer circumference of the game area,
A transparent flat plate-shaped game panel attached to the rear side of the front component member and partitioning the rear end side of the game area.
Behind the game panel, it is mounted so as to be movable in a predetermined direction, and a force that constantly tries to move it to one side in the moving direction is acting, and at least the front surface is decorated. With the body
A main body portion extending parallel to the surface of the game panel and a regulating portion extending from the tip of the main body portion parallel to the surface of the game panel and extending at a right angle are provided, and the regulating portion comprises the movable decorative body. The main body portion is rotated so as to rotate between a lock position where the restricting portion abuts with the movable decorative body and a release position where the restricting portion is moved to a side opposite to the one side so that the restricting portion does not abut with the movable decorative body. A lock member whose base end is rotatably attached around an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game panel at a portion outside the movable range of the movable decorative body.
Rotating means for rotating the lock member between the lock position and the release position according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area.
It is provided with a moving means for moving the movable decorative body to the side opposite to the one side according to the gaming state. "

Here, the "game" refers to "a game medium aiming at a predetermined receiving port (for example, a starting port, a variable starting port, etc.) where a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. When a special lottery result is drawn in which an advantageous game state is generated by receiving the game medium into a predetermined reception, a specific reception (for example, variable) that pays out a predetermined number of game media by accepting the game medium Since the winning opening, the big winning opening, the character winning opening, etc.) are opened, the entrance where the game medium is hit by aiming at a specific entrance "and the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given (the entrance ( For example, a game in which a game medium is driven in aiming at a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc. ”,“ After inserting the game medium, multiple symbols are displayed for each. After the plurality of provided symbol rows (for example, the rotating body) are variablely displayed (for example, rotated), the variable display of each symbol row is such that the combination of the symbols is given a privilege including the payout of the game medium. "A game to stop the game", etc. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical ones (game balls)", "disk-shaped ones (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, there are a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and a privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. "Area in which" and "Multiple symbols are provided for each, and each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given depending on the situation, etc.

The "game panel" may be transparent and flat, and may be "acrylic resin plate", "polycarbonate resin plate", "ABS resin plate", "polypropylene plate", "polyarylate resin plate", or "methacryl". Examples include "resin plate" and "glass plate".

Furthermore, as "movable decorative bodies", "the ones that are attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction and have a force acting to constantly move them downward due to gravity" and "they are attached so as to be movable in the horizontal direction". It is attached so that it can be moved in the vertical direction and is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic member. A force that constantly tries to move it to the side is acting. " Further, the movable decorative body may be attached so that both ends in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction are movable, or may be attached so as to be movable only in one place.

In addition, as "decoration" of the movable decorative body, "decoration imitating an item in line with the concept of the game machine", "decoration imitating a logo or dialogue in line with the concept of the game machine", "decoration imitating the concept of the game machine" Examples include "decoration that imitates a character along", "decoration that imitates a geometric pattern", "decoration that imitates animals and plants", and "decoration that imitates a landscape or background".

Further, the "lock member" includes "a guide portion that extends diagonally from the tip of the regulation portion to the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion" and "from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position". A stopper for restricting the rotation of the gear is further provided. "," A transmission portion consisting of an elongated slit or a columnar pin for transmitting and rotating the drive from the rotating means is formed. It is further provided with a protruding portion protruding from the base end portion of the main body portion in the direction opposite to the regulating portion. ”,“ It is formed on the main body portion, and the drive from the rotating means is transmitted. Further equipped with a transmission part consisting of a long-hole slit or a columnar pin for rotating the shaft, and "protruding in a fan shape from the base end of the main body around the rotating shaft core". A slit, which is provided with a transmission gear for rotating by a rotating means "," A guide portion, a stopper, a protrusion, a transmission portion, and a transmission gear portion, which are provided with at least two. " , Etc. can be mentioned.

Further, only one lock member may be provided, or a plurality of lock members may be provided in the moving direction of the movable decorative body, or the movable decorative body may be movable when both ends are movablely attached. It may be provided at both ends attached to the.

Further, as the "rotating means", "a transmission consisting of a slider slid by a moving means for moving the movable decorative body and a long hole-shaped slit or a columnar pin of a lock member attached to the slider". Those provided with a transmitted portion consisting of a columnar pin or an elongated slit connected to the portion "," A slider slid by a moving means for moving a movable decorative body, and a slider attached to the slider It is equipped with a transmission rack gear that meshes with the transmission gear of the lock member. ”,“ A drive motor, a solenoid that moves by the rotation of the drive motor, and a long hole-shaped lock member that is attached to the slider. Those equipped with a transmission unit consisting of a cylindrical pin or an elongated slit connected to a transmission unit consisting of a slit or a columnar pin ”,“ a drive motor and moving by rotation of the drive motor It is equipped with a slider and a transmission rack gear that is attached to the slider and meshes with the transmission gear of the lock member. " Those provided with a columnar pin or a transmitted portion composed of a long-hole-shaped slit connected to a transmission portion composed of an elongated hole-shaped slit or a cylindrical pin "," A solenoid and a motor driven by the solenoid A slider that moves forward and backward, and a transmission rack gear that is attached to the slider and meshes with the transmission gear of the lock member. ”,“ The drive motor and the drive motor that rotates by the rotation of the drive motor and meshes with the transmission gear of the lock member. Those equipped with a transmission gear, etc. ", and the like.

In addition, "according to the game state" means "a game to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area). "According to the acceptance of the medium", "According to the game medium circulating in the gaming area passing through a specific area (for example, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.)", "Reception arranged in the gaming area" According to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium at the entrance (for example, the starting port) ", the lottery is performed by accepting the game medium at the receiving entrance (for example, the starting port) arranged in the game area. Depending on the type of production (for example, reach production, jackpot production, loss production, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery, "a plurality of symbols are provided for each with the introduction of the game medium. "According to the rotation of the rotating body", "In response to the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating body, a plurality of rotating bodies each provided with a plurality of symbols are rotated and then stopped in sequence, triggered by the input of the game medium. , "According to the amount of the game medium driven into the game area", "Depending on the length of the driving blank of the game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, the "moving means" includes a "drive motor, a female screw shaft that is rotated by the drive motor and extends in the moving direction, and a moving slider that is screwed with the female screw shaft to move the movable ornament. , "A pair of pulleys that are separated in the direction of movement, a drive motor that rotates one pulley, a belt that is wound around the pair of pulleys, and a part of the belt are attached. It is also equipped with a moving slider that is slidably attached in the direction of movement and for moving the movable decorative body. " Further, as the means of transportation, the movable decorative body may be moved only to the side opposite to one side, or the movable decorative body can be moved to any direction side. You may.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is attached to a gaming area in which a game is played, a frame-shaped front component that divides the outer periphery of the game area, and a rear side of the front component, and the game area. A transparent flat plate-shaped game panel that divides the rear end side, and a force that is attached so as to be movable in a predetermined direction behind the game panel and always tries to move to one side in the moving direction. Is working, at least the movable decorative body with decoration on the front, the main body extending parallel to the surface of the game panel, and extending from the tip of the main body parallel to the surface of the game panel at a right angle. A locking position where the regulating part comes into contact with the movable decorative body and a release position where the regulating part is moved to the opposite side to the opposite side so that the regulating part does not come into contact with the movable decorative body. The base end of the main body is rotatably attached around an axis extending perpendicular to the surface of the game panel at a portion outside the movable range of the movable decorative body so as to rotate between them. A rotating means for rotating the lock member and the lock member between the lock position and the release position according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, and depending on the game state. It is provided with a moving means for moving the movable decorative body to the side opposite to one side.

First, a force for moving the movable decorative body to one side in the moving direction is constantly acting on the movable decorative body. In the normal state, the lock member is in the locked position, and the movable decorative body is in contact with the regulating portion of the locking member, so that the movement of the movable decorative body to one side of the regulating portion is restricted. There is. As a result, the movable decorative body is visible at a predetermined position in the game area in the front view through the transparent game panel that partitions the rear end of the game area. Then, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area, the regulating portion moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the movable decorative body. By doing so, the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on one side in the moving direction due to the force that constantly tries to move it to one side. After that, the movable decorative body is moved to the side opposite to one side by the moving means to a position beyond the regulation portion of the lock member, and the lock member is returned to the normal state by setting the lock member in the locked position. be able to.

As a result, the movable decorative body arranged behind the game area moves to the moving end on one side according to the game state, so that the player can be surprised by the movement of the movable decorative body, and the movable decorative body can be surprised. It is possible to entertain the movement of the body and make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, when unlocking the movable decorative body, the locking member is rotated so that the regulating portion moves to the opposite side to one side, that is, to the opposite side to the direction in which the movable decorative body intends to move. Since it is moved, even if the force acting from the movable decoration side to one side is strong, the movable decoration can be made difficult to come off from the regulation part, and the movable decoration moves to the moving end on one side without permission. It is possible to surely prevent it from being stored. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to one side without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the movement without permission, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from coming off the lock member (regulatory portion) and moving without permission, the movable decorative body can be unlocked and moved at a desired timing according to the gaming state. The decorative body can be moved, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In addition, since the movable decorative body is provided with a moving means for moving the movable decorative body to the side opposite to one side, the movable decorative body is moved by the force always acting on one side by the lock member and the moving means. It becomes possible to prevent this. That is, since it is possible to double lock the lock member and the moving means, it is possible to prevent a problem that the movable decorative body moves to one side without permission, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. be able to.

In addition, after providing an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the game area in the front view behind the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body straddles the effect display means in the front view. In addition to extending in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction, both ends in the longitudinal direction may be attached so as to be movable. As a result, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state, a large movable decorative body straddling the effect display means traverses or crosses the front side of the effect display means. Since it will move, the movable decoration can block the effect image displayed on the effect display means, so that the player can be made aware of the movement of the movable decoration, and the player's interest is focused on the movable decoration. It can be strongly attracted. In addition, the movement of the large movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the player can be attracted to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state will occur, which is advantageous, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

By the way, as described above, when the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means and both ends in the longitudinal direction are movablely attached, the movable decorative body extends in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction. The decorative body tends to tilt, but as described above, when the movable decorative body is unlocked by the locking member, the regulating portion of the locking member moves to the opposite side to the direction in which the movable decorative body intends to move. Since the lock member is rotated so as to make it difficult for the movable decorative body to come off from the regulating part, even if the movable decorative body is tilted, it does not come off from the regulating part, and the movable decorative body moves to one side without permission. It is possible to prevent it from moving. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to one side without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the movable decorative body without permission. , The lock can be released and the movable decorative body can be moved at a desired timing according to the game state, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In addition, when the effect display means is provided, by displaying the effect image in the effect display means, the player can be entertained by the effect image, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. it can. Further, when the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image is provided, by displaying the effect image that matches the movement of the movable decorative body, a collaborative effect (for example, effect) between the movable decorative body and the effect image is displayed. It is possible to perform effects such as moving the movable decoration by the character displayed as an image, moving the character by moving the movable decoration, etc.), and the player gets tired of the various effects. It is possible to make it difficult to make it difficult to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, only one lock member may be provided. As described above, when unlocking the movable decorative body, the restricting portion moves the locking member to the opposite side to the direction in which the force for constantly moving the movable decorative body is acting. Since it is rotated, even if the force to constantly move it becomes strong or the movable decorative body becomes large, the movable decorative body can be made difficult to come off from the regulation portion, so that one lock member can be used. The movable decorative body can be sufficiently locked, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, when only one lock member is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing them as compared with the case where a plurality of lock members are provided, and a space for providing the lock member is possible. It can be made smaller, and the movable ornament can be made larger and more conspicuous.

Further, it is desirable that the lock member is attached near the moving end on the side opposite to one side in the moving direction of the movable decorative body. As a result, since the lock member is attached near the moving end on the side opposite to one side in the moving direction of the movable decorative body, the lock by the lock member is released and the movable decorative body is moved to the moving end on one side. It is possible to lengthen the moving distance of the movable decorative body as much as possible. Therefore, when the movable decorative body moves a long distance, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the movable decorative body, and at the same time, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the lock member is attached near the moving end, a certain distance (space) is secured between the lock member (regulating portion) and the moving end, so that the lock member is locked by the rotating means. It is possible to secure a space in which the regulating portion can move when rotating the member from the lock position to the release position, the lock member can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the movable decorative body can be moved by the lock member. Can be locked and unlocked.

Further, the lock member may be provided with a guide portion that extends diagonally from the tip end of the regulation portion to the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion. As a result, the movable decorative body that has been released from the lock member and moved to the moving end on one side is moved to the side opposite to one side by the moving means, and is moved to the side opposite to the one side from the lock member. When moving, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guide portion in the locked position, and the tilt of the guide portion acts on the lock member to rotate the lock member toward the release position side. The lock member will rotate to the release position side. That is, when returning the movable decorative body to the original state (normal state), the lock member is released at the release position as the movable decorative body moves without rotating the lock member toward the release position side by the rotating means. It can be automatically rotated to the side. Therefore, when returning the movable decorative body to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the rotating means, the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control becomes unstable due to the overload, so that the game is played. It is possible to prevent people from being unable to entertain and deteriorating their interests.

Further, the lock member may be provided with a stopper for restricting rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position. As a result, the stopper of the lock member regulates the rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position, so that the force acting from the movable decorative body side in contact with the regulation portion at the lock position to one side is applied. Even if it is strong, it is possible to prevent the lock member from rotating to the side opposite to the release position and the movable decorative body from coming off the regulation portion, and the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on one side without permission. It is possible to surely prevent this from happening.

Further, when the lock member is provided with the stopper as described above, it is desirable to provide the lock urging means for urging the lock member in the direction of rotating the lock member from the release position side to the lock position. As a result, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the drive of the rotating means and then the drive of the rotation means is released, the lock member is automatically moved from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, even if the lock member is not returned to the lock position by the rotation means after the lock is released by the rotation means and the movable decorative body is moved to one side, the lock urging means is used. It can be returned to the locked position. Therefore, when returning the lock member to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to drive (control) the rotating means, so that the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control is not performed due to the overload. By becoming stable, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and degrading the interest.

Further, it is desirable that the moving direction of the movable decorative body is the vertical direction and one side is the downward side. As a result, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state, the movable decorative body moves so as to fall downward due to the gravity that is constantly acting. The falling movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player can be achieved. It is possible to strongly think that it will occur, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the movable decorative body is moved downward by the gravity that is constantly acting, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the movable decorative body to one side, and the configuration related to the movement of the movable decorative body. Can be simplified, the configuration related to movement can be made compact, and the movable decorative body can be enlarged by the amount of the compacted space, making the movable decorative body stand out for the player. It can attract a strong interest, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"It is further provided with an effect display means which is arranged in the center of the game area behind the movable decorative body in a front view and can display an effect image.
The movable decorative body is
It extends in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction so as to straddle the effect display means in the front view, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are attached so as to be movable. "

Here, as the "effect display means", "liquid crystal display (LCD)", "cathode ray tube (cathode ray tube) display device (CRT)", "plasma display", "laser display", "LED display device", " Examples include "organic EL display device" and "electronic paper display device".

According to the configuration of the means 2, the game machine is provided with an effect display means which is arranged in the center of the game area in front view behind the movable decorative body and can display an effect image, and is movable. The decorative body extends in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction so as to straddle the effect display means in the front view, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are attached so as to be movable.

As a result, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state, a large movable decorative body straddling the effect display means traverses or crosses the front side of the effect display means. Since it will move, the movable decoration can block the effect image displayed on the effect display means, so that the player can be made aware of the movement of the movable decoration, and the player's interest is focused on the movable decoration. It can be strongly attracted. In addition, the movement of the large movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the player can be attracted to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state will occur, which is advantageous, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

By the way, when the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means and both ends in the longitudinal direction are movablely attached, the movable decorative body extending in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction tends to tilt. However, as described above, when the movable decorative body is unlocked by the lock member, the locking member of the lock member moves to the opposite side to the direction in which the movable decorative body intends to move. Because it makes it difficult for the movable decoration to come off the regulation part, even if the movable decoration tilts, it will not come off from the regulation part, and the movable decoration will move to one side without permission. Can be prevented. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to one side without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the movable decorative body without permission. , The lock can be released and the movable decorative body can be moved at a desired timing according to the game state, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In addition, since the effect display means is provided, by displaying the effect image in the effect display means, the player can be entertained by the effect image, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. ..

Furthermore, since it is equipped with an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image, by displaying an effect image that matches the movement of the movable decorative body, a collaborative effect (for example, an effect image) between the movable decorative body and the effect image is displayed. It is possible to perform an effect in which the movable decoration is moved by the character displayed as, an effect in which the character is moved by the movement of the movable ornament, etc.), and the player is bored with various effects. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The lock member is
It is characterized by having only one.

According to the configuration of the means 3, only one lock member is provided.

As described above, when unlocking the movable decorative body, the restricting portion moves the locking member to the opposite side to the direction in which the force for constantly moving the movable decorative body is acting. Since it is rotated, even if the force to constantly move it becomes strong or the movable decorative body becomes large, the movable decorative body can be made difficult to come off from the regulation portion, so that one lock member can be used. The movable decorative body can be sufficiently locked, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since only one lock member is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the lock member as compared with the case where a plurality of lock members are provided, and a space for providing the lock member is provided. It can be made as small as possible, and the movable ornament can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The lock member is
It is characterized in that it is attached in the vicinity of the moving end on the side opposite to the one side in the moving direction of the movable decorative body. "

According to the configuration of the means 4, the lock member is attached near the moving end on the side opposite to one side in the moving direction of the movable decorative body.

As a result, since the lock member is attached near the moving end on the side opposite to one side in the moving direction of the movable decorative body, the lock by the lock member is released and the movable decorative body is moved to the moving end on one side. It is possible to lengthen the moving distance of the movable decorative body as much as possible. Therefore, when the movable decorative body moves a long distance, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the movable decorative body, and at the same time, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the lock member is attached near the moving end, a certain distance (space) is secured between the lock member (regulating portion) and the moving end, so that the rotating means This makes it possible to secure a space in which the regulating portion can move when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the lock member can be reliably rotated to the release position. You can lock and unlock the movement of.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The lock member is
It is further provided with a guide portion that extends diagonally from the tip of the regulation portion to the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion. "

According to the configuration of the means 5, the lock member is further provided with a guide portion that extends diagonally from the tip end of the regulation portion to the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion.

As a result, the movable decorative body that has been released from the lock member and moved to the moving end on one side is moved to the side opposite to one side by the moving means, and is moved to the side opposite to the one side from the lock member. When moving, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guide portion in the locked position, and the tilt of the guide portion acts on the lock member to rotate the lock member toward the release position side. The lock member will rotate to the release position side. That is, when returning the movable decorative body to the original state (normal state), the lock member is released at the release position as the movable decorative body moves without rotating the lock member toward the release position side by the rotating means. It can be automatically rotated to the side. Therefore, when returning the movable decorative body to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the rotating means, the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control becomes unstable due to the overload, so that the game is played. It is possible to prevent people from being unable to entertain and deteriorating their interests.

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
"The lock member is
It is further provided with a stopper for restricting rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position. "

Here, examples of the "stopper" include "a thing protruding from the main body so as to come into contact with another member", "a part of the main body formed so as to come into contact with another part", and the like. Be done.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the lock member is further provided with a stopper for restricting rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position.

As a result, the stopper of the lock member regulates the rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position, so that the force acting from the movable decorative body side in contact with the regulation portion at the lock position to one side is applied. Even if it is strong, it is possible to prevent the lock member from rotating to the side opposite to the release position and the movable decorative body from coming off the regulation portion, and the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on one side without permission. It is possible to surely prevent this from happening.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to one side without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the movement without permission, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
It is characterized by further comprising a lock urging means for urging the lock member in a direction of rotating the lock member from the release position side to the lock position.

Here, as the "lock urging means", "a device that urges the lock member to the lock position via a rotating means" and "one end of the lock member comes into contact with the main body of the lock member to lock the lock member". One that is urged to rotate to the position "," One that is urged to rotate to the lock position by contacting one end with the lock member (a part different from the main body) , Etc. can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the game machine is further provided with a lock urging means for urging the lock member in a direction of rotating the lock member from the release position side to the lock position.

As a result, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the drive of the rotating means and then the drive of the rotation means is released, the lock member is automatically moved from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, even if the lock member is not returned to the lock position by the rotation means after the lock is released by the rotation means and the movable decorative body is moved to one side, the lock urging means is used. It can be returned to the locked position. Therefore, when returning the lock member to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to drive (control) the rotating means, so that the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control is not performed due to the overload. By becoming stable, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and degrading the interest.

Means 8: In any one of means 1 to 7,
"The movable decorative body is
The movement direction is the vertical direction, and the one side is the downward side. "

According to the configuration of the means 8, the movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction and one side is the lower side.

As a result, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state, the movable decorative body moves so as to fall downward due to the gravity that is constantly acting. The falling movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player can be achieved. It is possible to strongly think that it will occur, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the movable decorative body is moved downward by the gravity that is constantly acting, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the movable decorative body to one side, which is related to the movement of the movable decorative body. The configuration can be simplified, the configuration related to movement can be made compact, and the movable decoration can be enlarged by the amount of the compact space, making the movable decoration stand out and the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 9: In the game machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A frame-shaped front component that partitions the outer circumference of the game area,
A transparent flat plate-shaped game panel attached to the rear side of the front component member and partitioning the rear end side of the game area.
An effect display means that is arranged in the center of the game area behind the game panel in front view and can display an effect image,
Between the effect display means and the game panel, the effect display means extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the effect display means in the front view, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction, at least. Movable ornaments with decoration on the front and
A main body extending vertically in parallel with the surface of the game panel, a regulating portion extending at a right angle parallel to the surface of the game panel from the tip of the upper part of the main body, and the main body extending from the tip of the regulating portion at a right angle. A guide portion extending diagonally toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the above and a stopper for restricting rotation are provided, and a lock position at which the restricting portion abuts on the movable decorative body and the restricting portion are provided. The base end portion of the main body portion is one of the longitudinal directions of the movable decorative body so as to rotate between the release position where the restricting portion does not come into contact with the movable decorative body by moving it upward. It is rotatably attached around an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game panel at a portion outside the end and near the upward moving end of the movable decorative body, and is described by the stopper. A lock member whose rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position is restricted,
A lock urging means for urging the lock member in a direction of rotating the lock member from the release position side to the lock position.
A rotating means for rotating the lock member between the lock position and the release position according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area.
It is provided with a moving means for moving the movable decorative body upward according to the gaming state. "

According to the configuration of the means 9, the game machine is attached to the game area where the game is played, the frame-shaped front component that divides the outer periphery of the game area, and the rear side of the front component, and the game area. A transparent flat plate-shaped game panel that divides the rear end side, and an effect display means that is arranged in the center of the game area in the front view behind the game panel and can display an effect image, and an effect. Between the display means and the game panel, it extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the effect display means in the front view, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and at least the front surface is decorated. The movable decorative body that is applied, the main body that extends vertically parallel to the surface of the game panel, the regulation part that extends at a right angle parallel to the surface of the game panel from the tip that is the upper part of the main body, the regulation part It is equipped with a guide portion that extends diagonally from the tip toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body, and a stopper for restricting rotation. The lock position where the restricting portion abuts on the movable decorative body and the restricting portion The base end of the main body is from one end in the longitudinal direction of the movable decoration so that the restrictor rotates between the release position where the regulating portion does not come into contact with the movable decoration by moving the movable decoration upward. Also, it is rotatably attached around the axis extending in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game panel at the part near the upward moving end of the movable decorative body, and the release position is from the lock position by the stopper. A game is played in the game area with a lock member whose rotation to the opposite side is restricted, a lock urging means for urging the lock member in a direction of rotating the lock member from the release position side to the lock position. A rotating means for rotating the lock member between the lock position and the release position according to the changing game state, and a moving means for moving the movable decorative body upward according to the game state. It is designed to be equipped with.

As a result, in the normal state, the effect display means for displaying the effect image in the center of the game area in the front view is located through the transparent game panel that divides the rear end of the game area, and the effect is produced. At the upper part in front of the display means, a large movable decorative body extending so as to straddle the effect display means in the left-right direction is located. In this state, the lock member is in the locked position, and the movable decorative body is in contact with the regulating portion of the locking member from above, and the movement of the movable decorative body is restricted to the lower side of the regulating portion. ing. Further, the lock member is urged from the release position side to the lock position side by the lock urging means, and rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position is restricted by the stopper. Then, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area, the regulating portion moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the movable decorative body. By doing so, the gravity acting on the movable decorative body causes the movable decorative body to fall (move) to the lower moving end so as to traverse the front of the effect display means. When the movable decorative body falls, the lock member rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock urging means. After that, when the movable decorative body is moved upward by the moving means, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guide portion of the lock member, the lock member rotates toward the release position side, and the movable decorative body becomes the regulating portion of the lock member. It is possible to move upward to a position beyond. Then, when the movable decorative body moves above the lock member, the lock member is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock urging means, and the movable decorative body is located at the upper part in the game area in the front view. It will return to the normal state.

In this way, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means according to the game state, a large movable decorative body that straddles the effect display means in the left-right direction traverses the front side of the effect display means. By blocking the effect image displayed on the effect display means, the movable ornament can make the player notice the movement of the movable ornament, and the player's interest. Can be strongly attracted to the movable ornament. In addition, by dropping a large movable decorative body, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the player can be attracted to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state will occur, which is advantageous, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

By the way, since the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means in the left-right direction and both ends in the left-right direction are movably attached, the movable decorative body is easily tilted in the left-right direction (horizontal). Become. On the other hand, when the movable decorative body is unlocked by the lock member, the restricting portion of the lock member is locked so as to move upward on the opposite side to the downward direction on which the movable decorative body is to move. Since the member is rotated to make it difficult for the movable decoration to come off the regulation part, even if the movable decoration tilts, it will not come off from the regulation part, and the movable decoration will fall downward without permission. Can be prevented. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from falling without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the movable decorative body from falling without permission, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust. The lock can be released at a desired timing according to the above, and the movable decorative body can be dropped, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In addition, since the effect display means is provided, by displaying the effect image in the effect display means, the player can be entertained by the effect image, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. .. Further, by displaying the effect image that matches the movement of the movable decorative body on the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image, a collaborative effect (for example, displayed as an effect image) between the movable decorative body and the effect image is displayed. It is possible to perform a production in which the movable decoration is moved by the character, a production in which the character is moved by the movement of the movable decoration, etc.), and the various productions make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Further, as described above, when the movable decorative body is unlocked, the lock member is rotated so that the regulating portion moves upward, so that the effect display means is straddled in the left-right direction. By using a movable decorative body of a size, even if the weight of the movable decorative body increases, the movable decorative body can be made difficult to come off from the regulation portion, so that the movable decorative body can be sufficiently locked with one lock member. be able to. Further, since only one lock member is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the lock member as compared with the case where a plurality of lock members are provided, and a space for providing the lock member is provided. It can be made as small as possible, and the movable ornament can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

Further, since the lock member is attached near the upward moving end of the movable decorative body, the moving distance from the regulating portion of the lock member to the lower moving end can be made as long as possible. Therefore, when the movable decorative body falls a long distance, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the movable decorative body, and at the same time, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lock member is attached near the upward moving end of the movable decorative body, a certain distance (space) is secured between the lock member (regulating portion) and the upper moving end. Therefore, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the rotating means, it is possible to secure a space in which the regulating portion can move upward, and the lock member can be reliably rotated to the release position. The movement of the movable decorative body can be locked and unlocked by the locking member.

Further, since the lock member is provided with a guide portion extending diagonally, when the movable decorative body is moved upward to return to the original state (normal state), the lock member is released by the rotating means. Even if it is not rotated to the side, the lock member can be automatically rotated to the release position side as the movable decorative body moves. Therefore, when returning the movable decorative body to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the rotating means, the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control becomes unstable due to the overload, so that the game is played. It is possible to prevent people from being unable to entertain and deteriorating their interests.

Further, since the stopper of the lock member regulates the rotation from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position, a strong force acts downward from the movable decorative body side that is in contact with the regulation portion at the lock position. However, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from coming off the regulation portion by rotating the lock member to the side opposite to the release position, and to ensure that the movable decorative body falls without permission. Can be prevented.

Further, when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the drive of the rotating means and then the drive of the rotation means is released, the lock member is automatically moved from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Since it rotates, it can be returned to the lock position by the lock urging means without having to return the lock member to the lock position by the rotation means after releasing the lock by the rotation means and dropping the movable decorative body. .. Therefore, when returning the lock member to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to drive (control) the rotating means, so that the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, and the effect control is not performed due to the overload. By becoming stable, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and degrading the interest.

Further, since the movable decorative body is moved (falls) downward by the gravity that is constantly acting, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the movable decorative body downward, and the movable decorative body does not need to be provided. The configuration related to movement can be simplified, the configuration related to movement can be made compact, and the movable decorative body can be enlarged by the amount of the compacted space. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the standing player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the movable decorative body is provided with the moving means for moving the movable decorative body upward, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from falling by the lock member and the moving means. That is, since it is possible to double lock the lock member and the moving means, it is possible to prevent a problem that the movable decorative body falls to the moving end on the lower side without permission, and the same action as described above can be prevented. It can be effective.

Means 10: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to 9.
The game machine
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, and
A plurality of receptions that are arranged in the game area and can accept game media, and
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the reception of the game media at the reception port.

Here, as the "reception entrance", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate "", "By accepting the game medium at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, the game medium can be used in the game area. Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, and "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area. Depending on the result, the game medium can accept the game medium in a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, accessory winning opening, etc.), and a specific area (for example, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state that gives the player an advantage when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there is a large winning opening or a character winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

In addition, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result in a variable manner according to the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state, and the means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called digital pachinko machine) "," winning a prize When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting the game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 10, a plurality of game machines are arranged in a game area in which the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, a reception port where the game medium can be received, and a game to the reception. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the effect of moving the movable decorative body by releasing the lock by the lock member (movable effect) is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is accepted into the reception, a predetermined number of game media are paid out and the movable decorative body is moved, so that the player is entertained and the reception is aimed at. It is possible to make it easier to continue driving the game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the lottery result is presented to the player when the result is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the movable decorative body may be moved. As a result, by moving the movable decorative body, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player by the action and effect as described above, so that the player can obtain the result of the special lottery drawn for the player. It is possible to make people think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and suppress a decline in interest. Further, as described above, by moving the movable decorative body, it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect, so that an effect for suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player (for example, It can be suitably used for (reach production), entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 11: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to 9.
The game machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the drawn internal lottery is given. ”,“ The effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed. It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine is operated by a plurality of rotating bodies, each of which has a plurality of symbols, and a player after the game medium is loaded, so that the plurality of rotating bodies are rotated, respectively. According to the combination of the plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating fuselage and the stop symbols of all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

In the effect of moving the movable decorative body by releasing the lock by the lock member (movable effect), the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols. At times (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies by the driving means may be rotated. As a result, the movable decorative body can be moved to strongly attract the interest of the player, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is the winning combination, the movable decorative body may be moved, and as a result, the movable decorative body can be moved to give a strong impact to the player. When stopped at a specific combination of symbols, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "BB"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect by moving the movable decorative body, it is suitable for the effect of suggesting the drawn internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 12: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to 9.
The game machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. After that, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, for example). , Advantageous gaming state) is given. If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. As a result, in a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

As for the effect of moving the movable decorative body by releasing the lock by the lock member (movable effect), the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols. At times (so-called reach), the movable decoration may be moved as one of the effects to be presented to the player, or when the lottery result of the internal lottery is the winning combination, the movable decoration is displayed. It may be moved, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the game area where a game ball is distributed by making a game panel opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board enlarged. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail in the state of showing. It is a front view of the front component and a game panel in a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the front component and a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front component and a game panel and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view showing a panel board in a game panel, an upper left panel decorative board, and a lower left panel decorative board, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail portion, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a panel board in the part of an obstacle nail which overlaps with a decorative pattern. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between a decorative pattern in a game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back front decorative board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is the panel decoration LED of the panel board and the panel decorative board. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship with. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 1st picture luminescent decoration in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd pattern is luminescent decoration in the front effect unit. It is a front view of the back unit of the game board which emphasizes the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which emphasizes the back-rear movable mechanism in a normal position by the back-rear movable decorative body. It is a front view of the back rear effect unit which shows the state which the back rear movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. It is a front view of the back rear effect unit which shows the state which the lock member was rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135, and the back rear movable decorative body was dropped. It is a front view of the back rear effect unit which shows the state which the back rear movable decorative body is moved up and down by the slide guide. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the lock member is rotating from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body by the slide guide. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. It is a front view which shows the state which the 5th pattern is light-emitting decoration in the back-rear decoration production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 6th pattern is light-emitting decoration in the back-rear decoration production unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) shows the back unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the state which the 3rd picture is luminescent decoration in the back middle production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 4th pattern is luminescent decoration in the back middle production unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotating upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the bearing slider is located at the descending end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 147. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotating downward from the state of FIG. 148. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit from the evacuation position to the standby position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowering position. FIG. 5 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between a standby position and a descending position by a slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back right movable decoration body of the back right effect unit in the back unit from the initial state to the first state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the movable decorative body on the back side of the back-up effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back lower movable decoration body of the back lower production unit in the back unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. In the back unit, the back-back movable decoration of the back-back effect unit is moved to the descending position, the back-right movable decoration of the back-right production unit is moved to the second state, the back-top movable decoration of the back-top production unit is moved to the appearance position, and so on. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the movable decorative body under the back of the underside production unit is moved to the ascending position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the first picture is light-emitting decoration on the front light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting decoration on the front light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 3rd picture is light-emitting decoration on the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 4th pattern in the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle production unit in the state which it is light-emitting decoration. Back-rear decoration in the back-rear effect unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is luminescently decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back-rear effect effect unit. Back-rear decoration in the back-rear effect unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the sixth pattern is luminescently decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back-rear effect effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the first pattern is light-emitting decoration on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back right movable decoration body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. It is attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped game panel 1100 which is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, the board holder 1200 which is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The unit 3100, the back middle production unit 3200, the back right production unit 3300, the back top production unit 3400, the back bottom production unit 3500, the back front production unit 3600, etc. are used to perform movable production and light emission production to give the player a player. Can be entertained.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion posterior to the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached at a position to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the outer frame left member 11 on the right side surface in front of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the assembled state, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. , The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are rear. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a in which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball striking supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the working paddle 143c protruding forward of the ball pulling member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 operated by pressing the upper dish ball pulling button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operation paddle 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission unit, the ball extraction member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It can be prevented from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal taxiway of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. It is provided with a full tank ball receiving port 150b which is open to the rear on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in the front view and can communicate with the full tank taxiway of the lower full tank ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball socket 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank receiver 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the working protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged apart from each other on the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that project outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded and bulges forward, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is affected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before the single-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and projecting forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For the ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The whole dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission part 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the taxiway 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the lent game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the loaned game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is mounted below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game from a position lower than the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is urged upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the upward moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guideway 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached to the entire surface of the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 located directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper left decorative body 271, and a dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a shape in which the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The upper right decorative body 276 of the dish has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285, in cooperation with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283 which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish are made to emit light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is emitted. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is provided. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It includes a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from below, and the portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The legs 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 are attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably attached around the axis extending vertically to the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates vertically at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has a circular outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower parts extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b, which is arranged in a plurality of positions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , Drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It has 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the range of a predetermined rotation angle by the operation ring drive motor 342. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower part. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. The elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and can be mounted vertically above the elevating base 364 by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It includes a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 is composed of an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380 to form an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which projects downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate and decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and extends upward from the inner circumference of the annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and the central button main body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in a plan view, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, by driving the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that the player can easily do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type production. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 has a width in the left-right direction and a depth in the front-rear direction formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four upper, lower, left and right parts.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates the front and rear, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a 1/4 portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating up and down on the outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed in the front and rear at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the machine is tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501, which face the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 to the front, are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It includes a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle 182 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, extending to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The sphere rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, thereby forming the inside of the tank rail 553. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90A is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball pulling passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball pulling passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b, so that the pachinko machine can be discharged more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank discharge passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and the foul cover unit 150 communicates with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball pulling guidance portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 that is attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the vertically extending shaft, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 651 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99A. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In front view, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball squeeze) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears and belts can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island facility, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height of the upper edge of the outer circumference. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearranged from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed so as to match, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a gaming board showing the inside of a gaming area in which a gaming ball is distributed by making the gaming panel opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit on the game board. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. Further, the game board 5 is a game performed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97, 168, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The drive board unit 1700, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It includes a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative substrate and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and an effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the game ball accepted in the large winning opening 2005 are distributed. It is provided with a reception space 2006 having a predetermined size, and a first reception entrance 2007 and a second reception entrance 2008 for receiving a game ball in the reception space 2006.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 and the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, are attached to the right side of the front view, and one general winning opening 2001, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, and large winning opening. 2005, the attacker unit 2400 having the reception space 2006, the first reception 2007, and the second reception 2008, and above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached slightly upward, and a front effect unit 2600 that is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes a mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 168).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back-rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part of the back box 3010, a back-middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-rear effect unit 3100, and a back-middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the lower part of the front surface. It includes a back-bottom effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-bottom effect unit 3500.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. FIG. 116 is a front view of the front component and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a view of the front component and the game panel from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a front view showing the panel board in the game panel, the upper left panel decorative board, and the lower left panel decorative board, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the portion of the specific obstacle nail, (c). ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the part of the obstacle nail that overlaps the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the game panel and the obstacle nail. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back front decorative board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 123 (b) is the panel decoration of the panel board and the panel decoration board. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship with LED.

The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate cover in which the panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the pal holder 1120. It is equipped with 1135. The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. The board cover 1135 is composed of an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed to have a thin plate thickness because it is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge by a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and the like. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 or the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in FIG. 121A and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper and right sides are narrow so that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up. In the present embodiment, in the panel plate 1110, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 121 (a), the portion having a wide width is designated as the decorative pattern forming region 1101, and the portion having a narrow width is defined as the decorative pattern forming region 1101. The decorative pattern non-forming region 1102 is used.

The panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment is a pattern in which the glass is cracked. The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decoration pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front player side even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitted, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. Further, when the panel plate 1110 emits light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and causes light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a pattern like a crack is emitted and decorated. Can be done.

The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 includes a radiation portion 1151 that mainly reflects the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside and the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. It is composed of a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects and guides light along a line. The radiating light guide unit 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer peripheral length in cross section as compared with the radiating unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. , Can guide light in the direction of the groove extension. That is, the radiating light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating units 1151 connected by itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of arrangements of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be increased. Within the limited range, the photosensitivity (ratio of the amount of light radiated (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. More specifically, as shown by the two-point chain line in FIG. 121 (a), the radiated light guide unit 1152 is usually from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the range of the light guide region 1103, the radiating portion 1151 is made to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

As a result, the radiation light guide portion 1152 has more radiation than the radiation portion 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually the portion outside the light guide region 1103). It is possible to allow light to reach and decorate the radiating portion 1151 with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 to form a pattern like a crack. The formed decorative pattern 1150 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

In the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the gate portion 2003. If the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent due to contact with the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning opening 2001 changes, so that the game hall side It is a target for constant maintenance so that there is no distortion.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 122, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is set within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) centered on the specific obstacle nail N1. The radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 are not formed inside. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the groove of the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 is not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is specified in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from cracking or cracking.

Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N planted at the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150 is planted on the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). The tip is projected inside the groove (radiating light guide portion 1152 in the figure) constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding inside the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. As a result, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can be shown a light emitting effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. In addition, in the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in the special portion, thereby, together with the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The obstacle nail N in a special part can be made to shine, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the obstacle nail N in a special part, and the game ball B aimed at the special obstacle nail N can be driven. The operation can be performed.

Further, in the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, a part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 formed in the linear groove is in the back unit 3000 described later as shown in FIG. 123A. The back front decorative substrate 3603 of the back front effect unit 3600 is formed along the inner outer edge facing the center side of the front view game area 5a. As a result, when the decorative pattern 1150 (radiating portion 1151 and radiating light guide portion 1152) is made to emit light by the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the inner outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 is seen from the player side. It can be luminescent and decorated. Further, as a result, the inner outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 is luminescently decorated in the front view, so that the back front decorative substrate 3603 can be relatively darkened and hard to see, and the gaming area in the front view can be made difficult to see. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cutting debris discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good state.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 having substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a penetrating through port 1121.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1123 and the plurality of protruding pins 1124 projecting forward from the holding step portion 1123 and each of which is inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It comprises a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively. In the panel holder 1120, the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then the upper part of the panel plate 1110 is moved rearward to move the upper part and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 has two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and rearward behind each board mounting recess 1127. It is provided with two connect recesses 1128, which are recessed from the front to the front. The upper left board cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is attached and the lower left board cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board mounting recesses 1127, respectively, from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 in the front component 1000. The lower substrate mounting recess 1127 has an engaging claw 1125 that engages with the engaging step 1114 at the lower left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110 protruding from the boundary side with the holding step 1123.

In the connect recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 attached to the board mounting recess 1127 and the connector 1132a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 penetrate the rear wall of the board mounting recess 1127. The size is such that a sufficiently large space is formed around the connector 1131b and the connector 1132b so that a finger can be inserted in the state of protruding inward. As a result, it is possible to easily connect and disconnect the connection cable (not shown) to the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. The plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion on the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and the rest is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the lower right so as to be perpendicular to the diagonal portion on the upper left of the panel plate 1110. A connector 1131a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131.

A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. The lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower locking claw 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are moved upward and right while avoiding the cutout portion. It is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the upper right. A connector 1132a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as to be inconspicuous from the front. Further, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can also irradiate light forward.

As shown in FIG. 123B, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged so that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decorative LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. There is. As a result, the size of the panel decorative board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than that of the panel board 1110, the panel decorative board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100). The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emitting decorated while suppressing the increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and is large enough to be larger than the size of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It is the board surface of. In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has an area (surplus) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted, are not mounted. Area). As a result, the mounting strength of the panel decorative board 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to prevent the displacement of the positional relationship of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in the incident of light on the panel plate 1110.

Further, since the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted on the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1150, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are performed. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decorative substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration and the like acting on the panel decorative substrate 1130 (panel decorative LED 1130a), suppress the decrease in durability of the panel decorative LED 1130a, and similarly to the above, the panel decorative substrate 1130. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 from being displaced, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in light incident on the panel plate 1110. ..

A panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1150. The substrate cover 1150 is formed to be frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a. There is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the fact that the light (leaked) radiated forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and causes the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a crack-shaped decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the transparent panel plate 1110, which is transparent and three-dimensional as compared with the conventional decoration by the printing sheet. You can show the player some decorations. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light, and the game ball B in the game area 5a which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines is generated. It is possible to show the player the luminous decoration of the distribution area.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a circulates in various flow paths, the decorative pattern 1150 is applied to the entire game area 5a. Compared with the case where the decorative pattern is formed, the cost related to the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

Further, since the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment has the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is made to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to illuminate from the rear, and it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, is lit up.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is arranged behind the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is made to emit light, the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 The attached certificate stamp (not shown) can be illuminated from behind to emit light, and the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the certificate stamp is lit up and decorated, which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, no condensing lens, diffusion lens, or the like is arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is directly irradiated to a wide range on the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be formed. It can be beautifully luminescent and decorated.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. When changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decorative patterns in order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, it can be handled only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decorative substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately mounted. I am trying to install it. As a result, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 have been removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied. The 1120 and the front component 1000 can be common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with the decorative pattern 1150, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. You may use it with the substrate cover 1135 and the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first inlet sensor 2404, a second inlet sensor 2405, a start port solenoid 2412, and an attacker. It is connected to a solenoid 2414, a V winning port solenoid 2416, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results for which the shin is drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 and 113. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107, 108, 112, 113 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 where the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and are arranged three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a near the right end of the front view and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The front unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The 2300 and the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, are attached to the right side of the front view, and one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, Above the attacker unit 2400 having the reception space 2006, the first reception entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached closer to the center accessory, and a front effect unit 2600 that is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002, which is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted. The start port unit 2100 is transparently formed except for the front surface of the first start port 2002, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is the center described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side in the left-right direction is on the right side. The general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side opens upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left of the front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side. There is.

The side unit 2200 is transparently formed except for the front surface of the three general winning openings 2001, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8c. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the receiving space 2006, the first receiving entrance 2007, and the second. It is provided with a reception port 2008 (see FIG. 108 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 has an external shape in front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which the game ball B flows (passes) up and down is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. Has been done. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004, and is always opened diagonally to the right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a reception space 2006 having a predetermined size for distributing the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 is arranged below the large winning opening 2005. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward is arranged in the receiving space 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 is always open upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. Two entrances 2008 are arranged.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B, and the gate portion 2003 is penetrated vertically with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is 5 times wider and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received by the second start port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the first entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received at the first entrance 2007, and the game ball received at the second entrance 2008. It includes a second inlet sensor 2405 that detects B (see FIG. 168).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting door 2004 and the second starting door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. (1) The attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, and the game ball B that opens and closes the first entrance 2007 (the game ball B that is accepted by the large winning opening 2005 and circulates in the acceptance space 2006 is the first. (Distribute to either the entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008) The V winning door 2415 and the V winning door 2415 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting door 2002 or the second starting door 2004. It is provided with a V winning opening solenoid 2416 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has gate portions 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and has a gate passage 2421 through which the game ball B can flow. , The left side passage 2422 extending vertically below the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and allowing the game ball B to flow, and the second starting port 2004 extending vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003. Above the right side passage 2423, which is bent so as to merge with the gate passage 2421 and through which the game ball B can flow, below the gate passage 2421 and the left side passage 2422, and above the grand prize opening 2005. It extends from the bottom of the gate passage 2421 to the left so that the left end side is lowered, and the attacker passage 2424 through which the game ball B can be distributed and the attacker passage 2424 extending from the left end to the left end side of the grand prize opening 2005 to the left. It is provided with a discharge shelf portion 2425.

In the gate passage 2421, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that the game ball B can pass through, respectively. There is. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the gate passage 2421 from above passes in front of the second starting port 2004 after passing through the gate portion 2003 and flows down to the attacker passage 2424. Further, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above passes through the left side of each of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 and flows down to the attacker passage 2424, and after passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a pattern in which the vehicle bends to the right to enter the gate passage 2421, passes in front of the second starting port 2004, and flows down to the attacker passage 2424. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above bends to the left after passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003, enters the gate passage 2421, and passes in front of the second starting port 2004 to enter the attacker passage. It flows down to 2424. If the second starting port 2004 is open when the game ball B passes in front of the second starting port 2004, the game ball B is accepted by the second starting port 2004.

The second starting port door 2411 allows the second starting port 2004, which is open forward, to be closed from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. It is installed. The second start port door 2411 is driven by the start port solenoid 2412 to rotate (rotate) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second start port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. , The game ball B that has flowed down in front of the second starting port 2004 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the grand prize opening 2005 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. It is possible. The large winning opening door 2413 can close the large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and can guide the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2424 to the left and deliver it onto the release shelf 2425. .. Further, the large winning opening door 2413 is retracted by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and the attacker is circulated through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423. The game ball B that has passed through the passage 2424 can be accepted by the large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

The V winning opening door 2415 is formed in the receiving space 2006 in a plate shape extending back and forth and extending left and right so that the right end is lowered, and opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The first entrance 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first entrance 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upward. It can be accepted at the entrance 2008. Further, the V winning opening door 2415 opens the first entrance 2007 by retreating by driving the V winning opening solenoid 2416, and receives the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 with a high probability. It can be accepted at the entrance 2007. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and the first inlet when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Open 2007. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 so that it can be received in either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008.

In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left of the directly below). At the same time, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the general winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first starting opening 2002. Further, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Does not pass through. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421, and the right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left downstream of the right guide passage 2510, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is any of them. It will enter the crab.

Then, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below the game ball B. At this time, if the second start door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second start door 2411. (2) It is guided to the start port 2004 side and is accepted by the second start port 2004. The second starting door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit". By appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start door 2411, etc., the game ball B itself that has been drawn for the "normal hit" can be used as the second start 2004. It can also be accepted by.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In this gate passage 2421, on the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, since it communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423, the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003 The entered game ball B can be circulated to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second start port door 2411 has moved to the open position and the second start port 2004 can be accepted, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game that has passed through the right side passage 2423. The ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Since the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421 becomes the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered is accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

The game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination of the game ball B, and is released downward from the left end of the release shelf portion 2425 through the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005. Will be done. At this time, if the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability of winning a large prize. Accepted in mouth 2005. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008 by the V winning opening door 2415. It is sorted into crabs.

The game ball B received in the first reception 2007 or the second reception 2008 is detected by the first reception sensor 2404 or the second reception sensor 2405, and then downwards (the substrate) behind the game panel 1100. It is discharged to the holder 1200 top).

The game ball B discharged downward from the release shelf portion 2425 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then delivered to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 passes through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and slightly above the center of the front view, and is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is mounted on the front of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can.

In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

The center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. There is.

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly separated from the right rail 1005 on the front component 1000 so as to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls B circulating on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage. You will be guided by entering 2510. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hit) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B to the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8f. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front effect unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 125 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and is directed toward the transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the right side surface of the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and light can be irradiated toward the upper surface of the first pattern substrate 2611 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 and the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a are mounted, and a second pattern substrate 2612 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is provided.

The front light guide plate 2610 receives only the first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by the innumerable first reflecting portions having irregularities that reflect only the light from the vertical direction and the light from the left and right directions. It includes a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by a myriad of concave-convex second reflecting portions that reflect forward. That is, when the light guide plate LED of the first pattern board 2611 is made to emit light 2611a, the front effect unit 2600 can make the first pattern 2621 emit light and display the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern board 2612. Then, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed by light emission.

In the front light guide plate 2610, the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2621 and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2622 are each formed with fine irregularities. When the light guide plate LED 2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitted, they appear transparent and various types of back units 3000 arranged on the rear side. The decorative body, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 125, the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that imitates the circumference of one eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as shown in FIG. 126, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks are formed in the glass. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full-color LEDs.

In the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 have their plate surfaces oriented parallel to the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and their thicknesses Is arranged in a direction parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, so that it is difficult to see the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 when viewed from the front (player side). It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board showing the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board emphasized. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes a mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 168).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back-rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part of the back box 3010, a back-middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-rear effect unit 3100, and a back-middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the lower part of the front surface. It includes a back-bottom effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-bottom effect unit 3500.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9a. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit in which the back-rear movable decorative body emphasizes the back-rear movable mechanism in a normal position. FIG. 134 is a front view of the back rear effect unit showing a state in which the back rear movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back rear effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the back rear movable decorative body is dropped. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by moving the back-back movable decorative body upward by the slide guide.

FIG. 139 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) disassembles the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-emitting decorated in the back-back decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-emitting-decorated in the back-back decoration effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost portion in the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the back rear movable effect unit 3110 having a quadrangular outer shape and a frame shape, and the back rear movable effect unit 3110, and is attached to the back box 3010. It is equipped with a decorative production unit 3150.

First, the back-back movable effect unit 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The rear-rear movable production unit 3110 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the total width in the left-right direction of the production display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided with a back-rear movable decorative body 3120 and a back-rear movable mechanism 3130 to which the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3120 extends in the left-right direction and projects outward from both the left and right ends of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates Nata, and a pair of back-rear movable mechanism 3130 that will be described later. It includes a left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 that are slidably attached to the slide shaft 3132 in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3121, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration. Before irradiating the light from the LED attached to the front of the movable decorative body decorative substrate after the back, which is attached between the substrate, the decorative substrate of the movable decorative body behind the back, and the decorative body 3121, and irradiating the front. The part that is attached to the rear side of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate and guides the light from the LED attached to the back surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate to be the lower part of the decorative body main body 3121. It is equipped with a rear lens that illuminates from the rear to the front.

The decorative body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is formed in a shape imitating Nata, and the left end side is the tip of Nata and the lower side is the blade of Nata in front view. In the decorative body 3121, a portion imitating the blade of Nata is transparently formed. Further, the decorative body main body 3121 is formed with a crack-patterned decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction.

The left slider 3122 projects forward from the front surface, and includes a lock projection 3122a that can come into contact with the restricting portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, which will be described later. Further, although not shown, the left slider 3122 is provided with a pair of sliding bushes that are vertically separated and into which the left slide shaft 3132 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bush has a plurality of bearing steel balls that come into contact with the slide shaft 3132 inside, and can smoothly slide with respect to the inserted slide shaft 3132 without rattling. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the vertical direction only on the left side by a pair of sliding bushes. Further, although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a detection piece projecting rearward. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150.

The right slider 3123 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the vertical dimension of the decorative body 3121, and has a cylindrical cross-section that sandwiches the slide shaft 3132 on the right side of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. It is formed.

The back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate is attached above the portion of the decorative body main body 3121, which imitates the blade of Nata. Back and rear movable decorative body The multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the decorative substrate are arranged concentrically around the lower side of the center in the left-right direction, and each LED radiates outward from the center. It is installed in the direction in which light is emitted. In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate are arranged in a row along the lower side and the right side of the rear view, and are parallel to the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate. It is installed so that the light is emitted toward the side.

The rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 can visually recognize the rear through a portion of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates a blade of Nata. Further, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate, a crack pattern decoration on the front surface of the decorative body main body 3121 is formed via the front lens. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface are made to emit light, the tip of the nata and the blade portion of the decorative body 3121 can be luminescently decorated via the rear lens. ..

The back-rear movable mechanism 3130 in the back-rear movable production unit 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is formed of a metal plate and has a square outer shape and a frame-shaped unit frame 3131, which extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. A pair of slide shafts 3132, each of which is attached to the unit frame 3131, and a spiral groove are formed on the outer circumference while extending vertically in parallel on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132 in front view. The spiral shaft 3133 rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131, the slide guide 3134 screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 and capable of contacting the lower surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the rotation axis upward. A spur gear-shaped motor gear (not shown) mounted on the rotating shaft of the rear rear drive motor 3135, which is attached to the lower left corner of the unit frame 3131 when viewed from the front, and a motor gear. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) that is meshed and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133.

Further, the rear-rear movable mechanism 3130 is a unit frame that extends vertically and extends vertically with a lock member 3141 that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends back and forth at a portion slightly below the upper left corner of the front view of the unit frame 3131. A transmission slider 3142 that is slidably attached to the 3131 in the vertical direction to rotate the lock member 3141, a lock spring 3143 that urges the transmission slider 3142 upward, and a unit frame 3131 above the lock member 3141. It is provided with a rotation restricting member 3144, which is attached to and restricts the rotation of the lock member 3141.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 is attached to the unit frame 3131 and the back-rear drive motor 3135 is attached to the lower surface thereof, and the box-shaped gearbox 3145 in which the motor gear and the drive gear are housed are contained. It includes a damper 3146 that is attached to the gearbox 3145 upward and a protective stopper 3147 that projects upward from the gearbox 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146.

The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four strip-shaped members constituting each side. The vertical height of the unit frame 3131 is substantially the same as the height inside the back box 3010, and the left and right lengths are substantially the same as the left and right widths inside the back box 3010. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are columnar metal shafts that extend vertically at substantially the same length as the unit frame 3131. The upper and lower ends of the pair of slide shafts 3132 are attached to the unit frame 3131, respectively.

The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132. The spiral shaft 3133 is made of metal.

The slide guide 3134 includes a guide main body 3134a into which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b that protrudes to the right from the guide main body 3134a and can come into contact with the lower surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120. I have. Although not shown, the slide guide 3134 is recessed from the tip surface of the guide protrusion 3134b to the left in the front view and penetrates vertically from the guide groove into which the left slide shaft 3132 is inserted and the guide body 3134a. It is equipped with a detection piece that protrudes rearward.

The slide guide 3134 is in a state in which the slide shaft 3132 is inserted into the guide groove at the tip of the guide protrusion 3134b to prevent the rotation of the spiral shaft 3133 around the axis, and the slide guide 3134 responds to the rotation direction of the spiral shaft 3133. Can move up or down. Further, in the slide guide 3134, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality of (two) slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150.

The lock member 3141 has a main body portion 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a base end portion which is a lower portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a tip portion which is an upper portion of the main body portion 3141a at right angles. A flat regulation portion 3141c that protrudes to the right in the front view and faces upward, a guide portion 3141d that extends diagonally from the tip of the regulation portion 3141c toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion 3141a, and the main body portion. The stopper 3141e projecting upward from the upper end surface of the 3141a, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding upward from the base end of the main body 3141a, and the transmission protrusion 3141f penetrate the transmission protrusion 3141f in the front-rear direction and transmit. The protrusion 3141f is provided with a transmission elongated hole 3141g extending in a projecting direction.

A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141. As a result, the lock member 3141 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth. In the regulating portion 3141c, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the locking projection 3122a from above. The guide portion 3141d is designed so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 can come into contact with the guide portion 3141d from below. The surface of the stopper 3141e facing to the right when viewed from the front can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 is slidably inserted into the transmission slot 3141g.

The transmission slider 3142 is formed of a metal strip extending vertically, and is formed to be slightly shorter than the height within the frame of the unit frame 3131. The transmission slider 3142 is slidably attached to a portion of the unit frame 3131 that constitutes the left side in the vertical direction. The transmission slider 3142 has a columnar transmission pin 3142a that projects in the front-rear direction near the upper end and is slidably inserted into the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141, and a guide protrusion of the slide guide 3134 that is formed at the lower end. It is provided with a release contact portion 3142b capable of contacting the 3134b, and a locking portion 3142c formed at the upper end and to which the lower end of the lock spring 3143 is hooked. The release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The upper end of the lock spring 3143 is locked to the upper end of a portion forming the left side of the unit frame 3131, and the lower end is locked to the locking portion 3142c of the transmission slider 3142. The lock spring 3143 urges the transmission slider 3142 upward.

The damper 3146 is a columnar damper body 3146a attached to the gearbox 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper body 3146a, and a columnar column attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. The contact receiving portion 3146c of the above is provided. Although not shown, the damper body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a columnar space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction) inside, and is slidable in the vertical direction (axial direction) in the space. A piston, a spring for urging the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in the space inside, and a piston rod 3146b extends upward and outward from the piston.

The damper 3146 is designed so that the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can come into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end from above. The damper 3146 has an elastic force due to a spring when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 comes into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c from above, and the piston inside the damper main body 3146a moves downward via the piston rod 3146b. The impact can be absorbed by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid. In the damper 3146, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state), the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c is located above the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. There is.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear movable effect unit 3110 will be described. In the normal state of the back-rear movable effect unit 3110, as shown in FIG. 133, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the state of the most raised retracted position, and the lock member 3141 is viewed from the front. Is in the locked position, which is the rotating end in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 is larger than the regulation portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is located above.

Further, in a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is on the back. It is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effect unit 3150.

In the lock member 3141 in the locked position, the main body 3141a is vertical, and the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding to the left from the base end of the main body 3141a is horizontal. Further, in the lock member 3141, the regulation portion 3141c projecting to the right from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a is located directly below the lock projection 3122a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the stopper 3141e projecting upward. Is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. Since the stopper 3141e is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, the lock member 3141 is further restricted from rotating in the front clockwise direction.

Since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 to restrict the rotation of the transmission protrusion 3141f in the upward movement direction, the transmission length formed in the transmission protrusion 3141f is restricted. The transmission pin 3142a inserted in the hole 3141g does not move further upward. Therefore, the transmission slider 3142, which is urged upward by the lock spring 3143, is restricted from further upward movement via the transmission pin 3142a by the lock member 3141 at the lock position.

In this normal state, the downward movement (falling) of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is regulated by the slide guide 3134. If, in this state, the slide guide 3134 moves downward to some extent due to some reason such as malfunction, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 becomes the restricting portion of the lock member 3141. Since it comes into contact with the 3141c, it is possible to restrict the movement (fall) below the lock member 3141 (regulating portion 3141c). That is, in a normal state, the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141 prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 from falling.

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3135, the guide body 3134a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 causes the spiral shaft 3133. The slide guide 3134 moves downward. By moving the slide guide 3134 downward, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, which is in contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the regulation portion 3141c of the lock member 3141, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 moves downward. After being restricted, the movement of the movable decorative body 3120 after the back is stopped, and the state of the standby position is reached (see FIG. 134). In this standby position, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is located below the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in a state of being detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150. Although not shown, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 is moved up and down so that the rear movable decorative body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decorative effect unit 3150 from the retracted position to the standby position. Extends to.

After that, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the rear-rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decoration 3120, and the rear-rear movable decoration 3120 is moved. Only the slide guide 3134 will move downward while remaining in the standby position (see FIG. 135).

In this state, the load of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c protruding to the right of the lock member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the lock member 3141 to have the bearing hole 3141b. Attempts to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction around. However, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left side, the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. Does not deviate from the regulatory section 3141c.

Then, when the lower surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving downward abuts on the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 becomes the back surface. It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the lower side of the rear decoration effect unit 3150. In this state, the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the rear-rear drive motor 3135 via the spiral shaft 3133, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. , The transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143.

When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so that the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141 in which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates about the bearing hole 3141b in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 136).

By rotating the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 3141c with which the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact from above is on the tip side (right end side) thereof. ) Moves upward and rotates so as to move to the left. That is, with the rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is raised via the lock protrusion 3122a by the rising tip side of the regulating portion 3141c, and the tip of the regulating portion 3141c is raised. The side slides to the left on the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a.

After that, when the lock member 3141 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the tip of the regulating portion 3141c moves to the left of the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decoration body 3120, the back rear movable decoration body The 3120 loses its support from below by the regulating portion 3141c, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 falls due to the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, from the lock position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the lock projection 3122a of the lock member 3141 to the position (release position) where the tip of the restricting portion 3141c is to the left of the left end of the lock projection 3122a. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 whose downward movement was restricted (locked) was unlocked, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 was placed in the standby position. Free fall from.

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen from the standby position, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 abuts on the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a via the abutting receiving portion 3146c. , The impact of the fall of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper main body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 comes into contact with the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stops falling and is in the lowered position.

When the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is on the left. It is located sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). That is, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has freely fallen from the standby position to the descending position is configured so as not to come into contact with any member other than the damper 3147.

As a result, even if the large back-rear movable decorative body 3120 extending to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the entire width of the effect display device 1600 is freely dropped at the same height from the upper part to the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3147 It does not come into contact with other members, and the other members are not damaged by a large impact. Further, even if the damper 3147 cannot sufficiently stop the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely, it abuts on the protective stopper 3147 in a state where the kinetic energy is attenuated by the damper 3147. Therefore, the fall of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be stopped without damaging the protective stopper 3147. Further, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely does not come into contact with the guide protrusion 3134b and is movable back-back. It is possible to prevent the slide guide 3134 from being damaged due to the contact of the decorative body 3120.

After the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is dropped to the lowered position, when the back-rear drive motor 3135 rotates the spiral shaft 3133 in the direction opposite to the above (here, in the clockwise direction in plan view), the slide guide 3134 Rise. When the slide guide 3134 is raised while the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is pressed downward by the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 and the transmission slider 3142 is slid downward, the transmission slider 3142 becomes a lock spring. Since it is urged upward by 3143, the transmission slider 3142 slides upward together with the slide guide 3134 (guide protrusion 3134b).

When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward, so that the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141 in which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is pressed. It rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the bearing hole 3141b as the center. Then, when the transmission slider 3142 slides upward along with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, and the lock member 3141 is further rotated in the clockwise direction. Along with being regulated, the upward slide of the transmission slider 3142 is regulated. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the state of the release position to the state of the lock position.

When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the rear-rear drive motor 3135 from this state, the transmission slider 3142 is restricted from moving upward as described above, so that the transmission slider 3142 is released from the release contact portion 3142b. The guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated upward, and only the slide guide 3134 is moved upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward abuts from below on the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 in the lowered position, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 via the left slider 3122. Will move upwards with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

In this back-rear movable effect unit 3110, after the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is dropped, it is moved above the lower position by the slide guide 3134, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is between the standby position and the lower position. By appropriately changing the rotation direction of the rear-rear drive motor 3135 while being located at, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137). ).

Then, when the back-rear drive motor 3135 moves the slide guide 3134 upward and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, which is moving upward from the descending position together with the slide guide 3134, moves to a height near the standby position, The lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position from below. From this state, when the lock protrusion 3122a (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is slanted, so that the lock protrusion 3122a in the guide portion 3141d A force to the left acts on the abutting portion.

Therefore, as the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward, the lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the bearing hole 3141b as the center due to the leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d. (See FIG. 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding to the left from the base end of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the rotation in the counterclockwise direction, so that the transmission protrusion The lock member 3141 is counterclockwise against the urging force of the lock spring 3143 acting in the clockwise direction via the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted into the transmission slot 3141g of the portion 3141f. Rotate to.

After that, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward, the locking member 3141 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the regulating portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d protruding to the right from the main body portion 3141a are locked. It moves to the release position to the left of the protrusion 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves above the regulation portion 3141c. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and is in the locked position from the released position. When the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is located above the upper surface of the regulation portion 3141c.

Then, the lock protrusion 3122a (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150. Then, the drive of the rear-rear drive motor 3135 is stopped, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is stopped at the retracted position. That is, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 returns to the normal state.

In this way, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the rear-rear drive motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 stands by. It can be freely dropped from the position to the descending position. As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a large nata (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Next, the back-back decoration effect unit 3150 of the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 has a quadrangular frame-shaped unit base 3151 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back second light guide plate attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closing the inside of the frame of the unit base 3151. The 3160 and the transparent frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the back second light guide plate 3160 and is decorated in a shape like broken glass. It includes a back-rear upper decorative substrate 3153 that is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 above the back second light guide plate 3160.

Further, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 has two decorative body detection sensors 3154 that detect the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 and two detection pieces that detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. It includes a slide detection sensor 3155 and a condensing lens 3156 arranged below the back second light guide plate 3160 and extending to the left and right.

Further, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 on both the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160, and faces the left and right both left and right sides of the back second light guide plate 3160. Between the pair of left and right fifth pattern substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 below the back second light guide plate 3160. It includes a pair of sixth pattern substrates 3172 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a that are mounted and capable of irradiating light toward the lower surface of the back second light guide plate 3160 are mounted.

The unit base 3151 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131. The back-rear decorative lens 3152 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131. The unit frame 3131 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inside) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The inside of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 projects into the frame of the unit base 3151 when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

The back-back upper decorative substrate 3153 is arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a capable of irradiating light downward are mounted on the front surface. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the back-rear upper decorative substrate 3153, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a are formed on the back-rear decorative lens 3152 inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that light is emitted to the inside.

The decorative body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side so that the detection piece of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 located between the retracted position and the standby position can be detected. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 are the upper part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side and the slide guide 3134 so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the retracted position can be detected. Attached to the lower part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the guide protrusion 3134b is at a height of contacting the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 can be detected. Has been done.

A pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are mounted on the rear surface in a state in which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a are arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b for illuminating and decorating the back-rear decorative lens 3152 are mounted. In the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the right, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface emit light toward the right. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are rear-rear from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is applied to the inside of the decorative lens 3152.

Further, on the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the left, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are mounted toward the left. It is mounted so that it can irradiate light. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are backed inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that light is applied to the inside of the rear decorative lens 3152.

A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a are mounted on the rear surface of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction on the front surface to illuminate upward. A plurality of LEDs 3172b capable of irradiating the light are mounted. When the sixth pattern substrate 3172 is irradiated upward with light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a on the rear surface, the sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be incident on the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condensing lens 3156. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, and the plurality of LEDs 3172b on the front surface are the back-rear decorative lenses from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that the inside of the 3152 is irradiated with light.

With the above configuration, the back-rear decorative lens 3152 emits light from the LED 3153a of the back-rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of LED3171b of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the LED3172b of the sixth pattern substrate 3172. The light radiated to the lens can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

The back second light guide plate 3160 has a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by innumerable uneven fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the vertical direction. It includes a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by a myriad of concave and convex sixth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 emits light from the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the fifth pattern 3161 can be emitted and displayed, and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 is displayed. When the light is emitted, the sixth pattern 3162 can be emitted and displayed.

In the back second light guide plate 3160, innumerable fifth reflecting portions forming the fifth pattern 3161 and innumerable sixth reflecting portions forming the sixth pattern 3162 are formed with fine irregularities. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 appear transparent when they are not emitting light, and are displayed on the rear effect display device 1600. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image and the like in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pattern 3161 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters "Change!" In a pattern like a sandstorm as a whole. As shown in FIG. 141, the sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which broken pieces of glass are scattered. This sixth pattern 3162 has less scattered glass fragments than the third pattern 3211 of the back-middle production unit 3200, which will be described later.

As shown in the figure, the characters "Change!" In the fifth pattern 3161 are arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and therefore, 21 in each of the left and right are arranged in the vertical direction, and the three in the center of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a. When only the characters are made to emit light, only the characters "Change!" Can be made to emit light. Alternatively, when the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the entire character can be emitted and displayed in a state where the characters "Change!" Are invisible (difficult to see). ..

The LEDs mounted on the back rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 in the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 are all side view type full-color LEDs. ..

In the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the back-rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 have their respective board surfaces backed up. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light guide plate 3160. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimensions of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 in the front-rear direction, and the fifth pattern 3161 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, the back-rear decoration lens 3152, etc. Can be made to.

Further, in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission are arranged only on the lower side side of the back second light guide plate 3160. Although the number is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a that emit and display the fifth pattern 3161, the condensing lens 3156 is arranged between the light guide plate LED 3172a and the back second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the light guide plate LED3172a from being condensed and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the sixth pattern 3162 can be emitted and displayed with the optimum brightness. Can be done.

[5-9b. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back middle effect unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (b) disassembles the back middle effect unit of the back unit for each main member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is light-emitting decorated in the back-middle effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth pattern is light-emitting-decorated in the back-middle effect unit.

The back-middle effect unit 3200 is attached to the front of the back-rear effect unit 3100 inside the back box 3010. The back-middle effect unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back middle effect unit 3200 has a quadrangular frame-shaped unit base 3201 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closes the inside of the frame of the unit base 3201. And the back middle decorative lens 3202, which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the back first light guide plate 3210 and is decorated in a shape like broken glass, and the back. The back middle left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210, and the back middle left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and are arranged vertically. It includes an extended condenser lens 3204.

Further, the back middle effect unit 3200 is attached between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the right outer side of the back first light guide plate 3210, and emits light toward the right side surface of the back first light guide plate 3210. It is mounted between the third pattern substrate 3221 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a that can be irradiated are mounted, and the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on both the upper and lower sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a capable of irradiating light toward both upper and lower surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 are provided.

The unit base 3201 of the back-middle effect unit 3200 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131 of the back-rear effect unit 3100. The unit frame 3201 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inside) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The back middle decorative lens 3202 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201. The inside of the frame-shaped decorative lens 3202 protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back middle decorative lens 3202, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

The back middle left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3203a capable of irradiating light toward the right are mounted on the front surface. The rear surface of the back center decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the back center left decorative substrate 3203, and the plurality of LEDs 3203a on the front surface of the back center decorative lens 3202 from the side surface side to the inside of the back center decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of 3202 is irradiated with light.

A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are mounted on the rear surface of the third pattern substrate 3221 so as to be able to irradiate light toward the left, and are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface so as to face to the left. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of irradiating light are mounted. When the third pattern substrate 3221 is irradiated with light to the left from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a on the rear surface, it can be incident on the inside of the back first light guide plate 3210 via the condensing lens 3204. The rear surface of the back-interior decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are the back-interior decorative lens from the side surface side to the inside of the frame-shaped back-interior decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of the 3202 is irradiated with light.

The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are mounted on the rear surface in a state in which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are arranged in rows in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b for luminescent decoration of the back middle decorative lens 3202 are mounted. On the upper fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light downward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are capable of irradiating light downward. It is implemented in. The rear surface of the back middle decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the upper fourth pattern substrate 3222, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are in the back from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that light is applied to the inside of the decorative lens 3202.

Further, on the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface illuminate upward. Is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the back-interior decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are directed from the side surface side to the inside of the frame-shaped back-interior decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of the decorative lens 3202 in the back is irradiated with light.

With the above configuration, the back middle decorative lens 3202 emits light from the LED 3203a of the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the LED 3221b of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the LED 3222b of the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222. The light radiated to the lens can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

The back first light guide plate 3210 has a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by innumerable uneven third reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left-right direction forward, and light from the vertical direction. It includes a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by a myriad of concave and convex fourth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back middle effect unit 3200 emits light from the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221, the third pattern 3211 can emit light and emit light from the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222. Then, the fourth pattern 3212 can be displayed by light emission.

In the back first light guide plate 3210, innumerable third reflecting portions forming the third pattern 3211 and innumerable fourth reflecting portions forming the fourth pattern 3212 are formed with fine irregularities. The light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 look transparent when they are not emitting light, and the back of the rear rear effect unit 3100 on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

As shown in FIG. 143, the third pattern 3211 is a pattern in which the glass is split into a plurality of fragments after the glass has radial and concentric cracks. In the third pattern 3211, more scattered glass fragments are drawn as compared with the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back rear decoration effect unit 3150. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend diagonally upward or diagonally downward.

As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is formed so that the diagonally extending streaks correspond to the LED 3222a for each light guide plate mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 on both the upper and lower sides. That is, when one light guide plate LED 3222a is made to emit light, the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction starts from the portion of the upper side or the lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210 that is closest to the light emitting light guide plate LED 3222a. Two light streaks (V-shaped light streaks) extending diagonally so as to be separated from each other toward the direction are luminescently decorated.

Since the fourth pattern 3212 is farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a toward the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, the brightness of the V-shaped light streaks is that of the back first light guide plate 3210. It gets darker toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (player side), the streaks of light appear to extend backward toward the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction, and the light is three-dimensional. It is possible to give the illusion that the light is radiated to the back, and the light emission effect by the back first light guide plate 3210 can be enjoyed.

The LEDs mounted on the back center left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern substrate 3222 in the back center effect unit 3200 are all side view type full-color LEDs.

In the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 each guide the back surface to the back first. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light plate 3210. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimensions of the back-middle effect unit 3200 in the front-rear direction, and to illuminate the third pattern 3211 and the fourth pattern 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back-middle decorative lens 3202, and the like. be able to.

Further, in the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for displaying the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 by light emission are arranged only on the right side side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Although the number is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a that emit and display the fourth pattern 3212, the condensing lens 3204 is arranged between the light guide plate LEDs 3221a and the back first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3221a from being condensed and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the third pattern 3211 can be emitted and displayed with the optimum brightness. it can.

[5-9c. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit that emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. Is. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the descending end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149.

The back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back right effect unit 3300 includes a back right movable effect unit 3310 attached to the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 and a back front right decorative body unit 3350 attached to the front surface of the back right movable effect unit 3310. I have.

First, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable production unit 3310 extends with a length shorter than the total width in the left-right direction of the production display device 1600, and is formed in a shape that imitates Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It includes a movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable mechanism 3330 that is rotatably attached around the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3321, which is a flat plate-shaped decorative body 3321 that imitates the nata, and has the same outer shape as the decorative body main body 3321. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative base 3322, which is mounted between the decorative base 3322 and the decorative body 3321, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces. 145) and.

The decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating Nata, and the left end side is the tip of Nata and the lower side is the blade of Nata in front view. The decorative body 3321 has a transparent lower half portion in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-patterned decoration that spreads radially around a central portion in the vertical direction near the tip.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 has a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the right end side in the front view of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body base 3322, and a lower side on the left side of the shaft hole 3324. It is provided with a columnar decorative body side link pin 3325 that projects rearward in the vicinity.

The back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light toward the front at a portion of the front surface behind the central portion of the crack pattern that spreads radially in the decorative body main body 3321. The central LED 3323a is a high brightness LED. Further, the back right movable decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b that irradiate the front surface and the rear surface with light in a direction along the surface of the substrate.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be decorated by emitting light so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting light from the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting light from the peripheral LED 3323b of the decorative body decorative substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern can be light-emitting and decorated.

The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable effect unit 3310 extends vertically and is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the unit base 3331 has a total height of about 3/4 from the bottom. A bearing that is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction at a height portion and has a columnar bearing pin 3332a that protrudes in the front-rear direction and is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back right movable decoration body 3320. It includes a slider 3332.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 has a back right drive motor 3333 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3331 with the rotation axis facing in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3333. The motor gear 3334 of the above, the transmission protrusion 3335a which is rotatably attached to the unit base 3331 while meshing with the motor gear 3334, and the detection piece which protrudes in the front-rear direction (not shown). It is provided with a spur gear-shaped link drive gear 3335.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a portion of the unit base 3331 diagonally lower right in the front view of the link drive gear 3335, and is mounted in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a that extends and is in contact with the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335, and a transmission gear portion 3336b that extends in an arc shape about the rotation axis, and a unit. A spur gear-like first spur gear that is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a portion below the rotation shaft of the transmission link gear 3336 in the base 3331 and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. It includes a one-gear portion 3337a and a two-stage gear 3337 having a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3337b that rotates integrally with the first gear portion 3337a and has a diameter larger than that of the first gear portion 3337a. ..

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is slidably attached to the unit base 3331 in the vertical direction and is formed on the rack main body 3338a and the rack main body 3338a extending vertically, and the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337 is formed. A slide rack 3338 having a rack gear portion 3338b that meshes with and extends linearly in the vertical direction, and a columnar movable mechanism side link pin 3338c that protrudes in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the rack body 3338a. A link arm that extends up and down, and the upper end side is rotatably inserted with the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and the lower end side is rotatably inserted with the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338. It is equipped with 3339.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and is movable on the back right by detecting the shock absorbing rubber 3340 that can come into contact with the back right movable decorative body 3320 and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335. It includes two movable position detection sensors (not shown) that detect the position of the decorative body 3320.

Subsequently, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. In the back right movable effect unit 3310, as shown in FIG. 147, in the normal state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising ends, and the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332a. The back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the base end side is rotatably attached is inclined so that the tip end side is located above the base end side (initial state). Further, in this state, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 is located slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324, and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is located. It is detected by the movable position detection sensor of one eye.

In this normal state, the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right side of the front view, and the transmission link gear 3336 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 3335a. The arm 3336a is in contact from the right side. More specifically, with respect to the straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the contact point between the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm The straight line connecting the contact point with the 3336a is orthogonal. As a result, the force acting on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the rotation center of the link drive gear 3335, so that the link drive gear 3335 rotates even if a force acts on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a. The transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves to the left in the front view (counterclockwise in the front view). That is, under normal conditions, the link drive gear 3335 regulates (locks) the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

By the way, since the bearing pin 3332a is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decoration body 3320 in the bearing slider 3332, the load of the back right movable decoration body 3320 acts via the bearing pin 3332a. are doing. Since the bearing slider 3332 is located at the rising end in the normal state, a force that causes the bearing slider 3332 to move downward is applied by the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

On the other hand, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, since the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, the shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a) due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 ), And a force is acting to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves downward (counterclockwise in front view). Then, a force that tends to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c from the decorative body side link pin 3325 via the link arm 3339. That is, due to the force of the back-right movable decorative body 3320 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to its own weight, the force of moving the slide rack 3338 downward via the link arm 3339 acts.

The force for moving the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted by the rack gear portion 3338b of the slide rack 3338 to the two-stage gear 3337 via the second gear portion 3337b that meshes with the rack gear portion 3338b, and is transmitted to the two-stage gear 3337. It acts to rotate the gear 3337 in the clockwise direction in front view. In this two-stage gear 3337, since the first gear portion 3337a meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336, the force acting to rotate the two-stage gear 3337 in the clockwise direction is exerted. , The transmission link gear 3336 acts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear portion 3336b. That is, the transmission link gear 3336 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force that the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to its own weight.

Then, in the normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336 because the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction is locked by the link drive gear 3335 as described above. The two-stage gear 3337 does not rotate, and the slide rack 3338 does not move downward due to the rack gear portion 3338b that meshes with the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

As described above, since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted, the entire link arm 3339 to which the lower end is attached to the slide rack 3338 does not move downward. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward about the upper end side (decorative body side link pin 3325) of the link arm 3339, but the back right Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decorative body 3320 is located at the rising end, rotation in the counterclockwise direction around the decorative body side link pin 3325 is restricted, and the back right The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the tip end side is located above the base end side.

In this normal state, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333 via the motor gear 3334, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 moves to the left and downward. It will revolve in the direction of movement. Then, the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the clockwise direction to change the position, so that the transmission link gear 3336, in which a force acts in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320, transmits. The protrusion 3335a rotates in the counterclockwise direction while changing the portion where the transmission arm 3336a and the transmission protrusion 3335a are in contact with each other so that the protrusion 3335a slides with respect to the transmission arm 3336a (see FIG. 148). ).

When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 also moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. Will be done. Since the load of the back right movable decoration 3320 is supported by the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side, when the link arm 3339 moves downward, the bearing slider 3332 also passes through the back right movable decoration 3320. It will move downward together.

As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the normal state (initial state) in a state where the tip side thereof remains high until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end. .. That is, in the state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the initial state and the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end (first state), the tip end side thereof is higher than the base end side as in the initial state. It is in an oblique state.

Then, after the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the slide rack is passed through the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337. The 3338 will move further downward. By moving the slide rack 3338 downward, the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pulled downward via the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is the axis on the base end side. With the hole 3324 as the center, the tip side rotates in the counterclockwise direction so as to move downward (see FIG. 149).

When the link drive gear 3335 is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decoration body 3320 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3324, and the lower surface thereof is the unit. By contacting the shock absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the base 3331, further rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, and the tip side is in an oblique state below the base end side (second). In the state), the back right movable decorative body 3320 stops. At this time, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the second movable position detection sensor, and the drive of the back right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor.

After the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, the back right drive motor 3333 rotates the link drive gear 3335 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, which is the opposite direction to the above. When the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission protrusion 3335a causes the transmission link gear 3336 to rotate in the clockwise direction, and the two-stage gear 3337. The slide rack 3338 will move upward via the above.

When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the descending end, the back right movable decoration 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decoration 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. It becomes. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward while the tip side remains low until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332 from the second state, and in the state where the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end (third state), the same as in the second state. The tip side is in an oblique state below the base end side (see FIG. 150).

Then, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 is further rotated in the clockwise direction and the slide rack 3338 is moved upward via the two-stage gear 3337. The link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338 presses the link pin 3325 on the back right movable decoration body 3320 upward, and the back right movable decoration body 3320 passes through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

After that, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the back right drive motor 3333 is driven. It is stopped and the rotation of the link drive gear 3335 is stopped. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising ends, and the back right movable decoration 3320 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is , The tip side is inclined so as to be located above the base end side. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 has returned to the normal state (initial state).

In the normal state, when the back right drive motor 3333 rotates in the direction opposite to the above (clockwise direction in front view), the link drive gear 3335 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, so that the transmission protrusion 3335a Is revolved so as to move upward, the contact between the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a is released, and the restriction on the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 by the transmission protrusion 3335a in the counterclockwise direction is immediately released. To. As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 changes (moves) from the initial state to the second state at once.

When the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. 149, the transmission arm 3336a of the transmission link gear 3336 is located within the revolving range of the transmission protrusion 3335a in the link drive gear 3335, so that the back is When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission projection 3335a comes into contact with the transmission arm 3336a from below. Then, when the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the transmission link gear 3336 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the transmission protrusion 3335a via the transmission arm 3336a, and the same movement as described above causes the back right. The movable decorative body 3320 returns to the initial state from the second state through the third state.

In this way, by driving the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decoration 3320 is rotated around the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, so that the back right movable decoration 3320 imitates the nata. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that looks like it has been lowered. Further, since the movement of moving the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state through the first state to the second state and the movement of returning from the second state to the third state to the initial state are different. , It is possible to show a plurality of movements to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state in which the nata is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) where the rotation center is located is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, as compared with the case where the base end side is not moved downward, more back right movable decorations 3320 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back right movable decorations 3320 stand out. be able to. Further, when the back right movable decoration body 3320 is moved to the position in the initial state, the base end side where the rotation center is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so that the rotation center of the back right movable decoration body 3320 By moving to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, it becomes difficult for the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a display area that can be visually recognized well can be obtained. It can be made wider, and the player can enjoy the production image more.

Next, the back front right decorative body unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back front right decorative unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3331 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and is decorated with a flat plate-shaped decorative base 3351 extending vertically. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3352 that is attached to the front surface of the body base 3351 and formed in a shape like broken glass, and is attached between the back front right decorative body 3352 and the decorative body base 3351. It is attached to the back front right decorative substrate 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light to the left are mounted on the front surface and the lower rear surface of the back front right decorative body 3352. The magnetic sensor 3003 is provided.

The back front right decorative body 3352 extends up and down in an arc shape so as to be located to the left as it goes upward. The back front right decorative body 3352 has a jagged shape on the left side side as if the glass is broken, and a crack pattern decoration is formed on the front surface. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 can illuminate the left edge and the crack pattern by emitting the LED mounted on the back front right decorative substrate 3353.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back-up effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back-inside effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape that imitates Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and extends in the left-right direction. The back-up movable decoration body 3410 and the left end of the back-up movable decoration body 3410. It is provided with a back-up movable mechanism 3420 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and is attached to the front surface of the back-middle effect unit 3200. The back-up movable decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is arranged in front of the back-back movable decoration body 3120 and behind the back-right movable decoration body 3320.

The movable decorative body 3410 on the back is attached to the rear side of the flat decorative body 3411 extending in the left-right direction and imitating the nata, and the decorative body 3411 having the same outer shape as the decorative body 3411. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative base 3412, a movable decorative substrate 3413 on the back, which is attached between the decorative base 3412 and the decorative body 3411 and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear surface, and a decorative body. A columnar shaft pin (not shown) protruding rearward from the rear surface on the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-shaped decorative gear that rotates integrally with the decorative base 3412 and is centered on the shaft pin (not shown). Omitted) and.

The decorative body 3411 of the back-up movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape like a combination of broken glass so as to imitate Nata, and the upper side and the lower side are formed in a jagged manner. The decorative body 3411 is entirely transparent. In the decorative body 3411, the peripheral surfaces of the jagged upper side and the lower side are inclined so that the rear side protrudes from the front side, and the front side is formed with a dented decoration in a crack pattern.

The decorative body base 3412 has an outer shape formed in the same shape as the decorative body main body 3411, and the peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side are inclined so as to be positioned forward toward the end side. The back-up movable decorative substrate 3413 is mounted so that a plurality of LEDs can irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the decorative base 3412. The back-up movable decorative body 3410 can illuminate the peripheral edge of the decorative body main body 3411 by emitting the LED of the back-up movable decorative body decorative substrate 3413.

The back-up movable mechanism 3420 is attached to the front surface of the back-middle effect unit 3200 and the unit base 3421 to which the shaft pin of the back-up movable decoration body 3410 is rotatably attached, and the rotation shaft attached to the front surface of the unit base 3421. The back-up drive motor 3422 protruding rearward and the transmission gear that is engaged with the decorative gear of the back-up movable decorative body 3410 while the rotation from the back-up drive motor 3422 is transmitted and rotates (not shown). And have.

In the normal state, the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position in which the back-up movable decoration body 3410 extends horizontally, and the back-up movable decoration is formed by rotating the transmission gear by the back-up drive motor 3422. The body 3410 can be in a state of an appearance position in which the tip side, which is the right end side thereof, is located below the base end side and extends diagonally.

[5-9e. Backside production unit]
Next, the underside effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The under-back effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 at the center of the lower front portion of the back-inside effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction. The under-back effect unit 3500 is a movable under-back decorative body 3510 that imitates a flower having a plurality of petals, and a movable under-back effect body 3510 that is attached to the lower front part of the under-back effect unit 3200 and moves the under-back movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with a mechanism 3520.

The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is a back surface in which a decorative body body 3511 which is three-dimensionally formed and has a plurality of petals imitating a flower and a plurality of full-color LEDs for luminescent decoration of the decorative body body 3511 are mounted. It includes a lower movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is arranged in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

The lower back movable mechanism 3520 is attached to the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the lower part of the decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the unit base 3521 and the unit base 3521. The under-back drive motor 3522, which is attached to the rear surface and has a rotating shaft protruding forward, and the under-back drive motor 3522 revolve around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to move the decorative body 3511 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an elevating drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin.

In the normal state, the under-back effect unit 3500 is in a state in which the under-back movable decorative body 3510 is in the most lowered lower position, and the revolving drive pin of the up / down drive gear is located at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the lower back drive motor 3522 rotates the elevating drive gear to revolve the drive pin, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 rises together with the upward movement of the revolving drive pin. Then, when the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive of the underside drive motor 3522 is stopped, and the rotation of the elevating drive gear (revolution of the drive pin) is stopped. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the raised position where it has moved most upward.

[5-9f. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape so as to follow the inner shape of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The front-back effect unit 3600 has a substantially C-shaped front view, and the outer circumference is formed so as to follow the inner shape of the game area 5a, and the inner circumference has debris remaining on the window frame. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front decorative body 3601 formed in a jagged shape like broken glass, and a flat plate-shaped decorative body base 3602 attached to the rear side of the back front decorative body 3601. It is attached between the decorative body base 3602 and the back front decorative body 3601 and includes a back front decorative substrate 3603 for emitting and decorating the back front decorative body 3601.

The back front effect unit 3600 guides the game ball B, which is received by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, downward and discharges it onto the substrate holder 1200. It is provided with a taxiway (not shown). Further, the back front effect unit 3600 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and a first starting port for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting in the game area 5a are attached.

The back front decoration body 3601 of the back front production unit 3600 is inclined so that the rear side protrudes from the front side on the inner peripheral surface, and a decoration recessed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side. .. The back front decorative substrate 3603 is composed of three components: a back front upper decorative substrate 3603a, a back front left decorative substrate 3603b, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3603c (see FIG. 127). A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3603 so as to face the center side of the C shape. The back-front effect unit 3600 can illuminate the inner peripheral surface of the back-front decorative body 3601 and the crack pattern by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-front decorative substrate 3603.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 152 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to a descending position. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the descending position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state.

FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-up movable decorative body of the back-up effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower movable decorative body of the back lower effect unit in the back unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. In FIG. 159, the back-rear movable decoration of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, the back-right movable decoration of the back-right effect unit is in the second state, and the back-up movable decoration of the back-up effect unit appears. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the movable decorative body under the back of the back lower production unit to the position, and moved to the raised position, respectively.

In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the center accessory 2500, etc., which partition the rear end of the game area 5a, are substantially as a whole. Since it is formed transparently, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 114, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, through them. The back front right decorative body 3352 of the back right effect unit 3300, the back front decorative body 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized.

In this normal state, the back right movable decoration body 3320 of the back right effect unit 3300 is located in the initial state, and is located below the inside of the C-shaped back front decoration body 3601. The club is facing forward. Further, the back-up movable decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400, which is arranged behind the back-right movable decoration body 3320, is in the retracted position and is located below the back-right movable decoration body 3320. A part of the lower part of the evacuation is facing forward.

Further, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, which is arranged behind the back-up movable decoration 3410, is in the retracted position and is located below the back-up movable decoration 3410. A small part of the tip that imitates the evacuation is facing forward. That is, under normal conditions, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is almost invisible. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is in a lowered position, and a part of the part located above the inside of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 is formed. Facing forward.

The game board 5 produces a back-to-back effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The back-right movable effect unit 3110 of the unit 3100, the back-right movable effect unit 3310 of the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, and the back-lower effect unit 3500 perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back-rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, the back-rear drive motor 3135 is driven via the slide guide 3134. The large back-rear movable decorative body 3120 extending in the left-right direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is placed in a normal state (with the retracted position) and the lock protrusion 3122a is a restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is reciprocated in the vertical direction between the state of the standby position that abuts on. In this movable effect, most of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 cannot be seen well from the player side, so it is possible to make something feel as if something is shaking up and down at the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can be done, and the player can be expected that something will happen.

Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the rear-rear drive motor 3135 to come into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the release contact portion 3142b is pressed downward by the slide guide 3134. , The lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the standby position at the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is displayed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Drop to the lowered position of (see FIG. 152). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a large nata (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

After that, the back-rear drive motor 3135 raises the slide guide 3134 to return the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position to the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the rear-rear drive motor 3135, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved to the vertical direction of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3134. It may be reciprocated up and down near the center. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3120. The movable decorative body 3120 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3120 after the back can be enjoyed.

As a movable effect using the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state of the state to the position of the first state. As a result, the entire back-right movable decoration 3320 is located below the inside of the C-shaped back-front decoration 3601, and the player is shown the entire back-right movable decoration 3320 that imitates Nata. Therefore, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not the Nata (back right movable decoration body 3320) is swung down after this, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation.

Then, the back right drive motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position of the first state to the position of the second state (see FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if the Nata modeled by the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down, so that the player can be surprised by swinging down the Nata. The interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the movable decoration body 3320 on the back right, and at the same time, it can be made to think that there is something good by swinging down Nata, which gives the player a sense of expectation for the game. It can be raised.

After that, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state through the third state by the back right drive motor 3333. When the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the position of the second state to the position of the third state, as shown in FIG. 156, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down in the second state. The player moves upward in the same posture, and from the third state to the initial state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates around the base end side so that the tip side of the nata moves upward, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the movement is clearly different from when Nata is swung down, and it returns to the initial state with a movement different from the initial movement from the initial state to the second state. The movement of the right movable decorative body 3320 can be enjoyed.

In the back right movable production unit 3310, the back right movable decorative body 3320 may be moved from the initial state to the second state at once without temporarily stopping in the first state, whereby Nata swings down at once. Since the movable effect can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

As a movable effect using the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 157, the back-up movable decorative body 3410 in the retracted position is driven by the back-up drive motor 3422 to the base end side (left end). It is rotated around the side) so that it is in the state of the appearance position in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, the back-up movable decorative body 3410 imitating Nata can show the player a movable effect that appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Since the back-up movable decorative body 3410 is formed as if the imitated nata was composed of broken glass fragments, it looks integrally with the back-front decorative body 3601 in the state of the normal evacuation position. Since it is difficult to notice its existence, by moving it to the appearance position, it is possible to make it appear that a part of the back front decorative body 3601 has moved, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player.

As a movable effect using the back lower effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 158, the back lower movable decorative body 3510 is moved from the lower back position to the ascending position by driving the back lower drive motor 3522. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 rises, which makes it easier for the player to see the flowers modeled by the lower back movable decorative body 3510. It can make you think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back-back movable effect unit 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-right movable effect unit 3310 of the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, and the back-lower effect unit 3500. It is also possible to perform a movable effect in which the above-mentioned movable effect using the above is appropriately combined. For example, first, the back-up movable decoration body 3410 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, then the back-right movable decoration body 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state position, and further, the back-back movable decoration body 3120 is moved. After dropping to the descending position, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the ascending position (see FIG. 159). Due to this movable effect, all the movable decorative objects are located in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player is confident that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur. It can be made to enhance the interest of the player. Further, in this movable effect, since a plurality of movable decorative objects are sequentially moved to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, after one movable decorative body is moved to the front of the display screen, the next movable decoration is next. Depending on whether or not the body moves to the front of the display screen, the player can be throbbing, the expectation of the player can be raised, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Subsequently, the main light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescent and decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a second pattern is luminescently decorated on a front light guide plate of a front effect unit. FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the third pattern is luminescently decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the fourth pattern is luminescently decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is luminescently decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back rear decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a sixth pattern is luminescently decorated on a back second light guide plate of the back rear decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

The game board 5 is a table production unit of the table unit 2000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2600, the back rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back middle effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, it is mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a are made to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and change the game state. It can make you think that you will do it, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 arranged above the front light guide plate 2610 are used. The second pattern 2622 is luminescently decorated by emitting light. As a result, the second pattern 2622 is light-emittingly displayed, which makes it possible to give the illusion that the entire front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is provided with cracked glass. Can be wondering and entertaining. Further, for example, if the second pattern 2622 is light-emittingly displayed during the reach production, the player can be made to think that the reach will be developed, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

As a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, it is mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221 arranged on the right side of the front view of the back first light guide plate 3210. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are made to emit light, and the third pattern 3211 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of broken and scattered glass pieces as the third pattern 3211 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, a plurality of guides mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 arranged on both the upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. The LED 3222a for the light plate is appropriately made to emit light, and the fourth pattern 3212 is light-emitting and decorated. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of V-shaped light streaks having a sense of perspective are emitted and displayed as the fourth pattern 3212, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly shown. , You can entertain the player with the luminous decoration.

As a light emitting effect using the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, a fifth light emitting effect is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pattern substrate 3171 are made to emit light, and the fifth pattern 3161 is light-emitting and decorated. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters "Change!" As the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed in light, so that the guide gives the player a chance. It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game and raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a plurality of mounted on the sixth pattern substrate 3172 arranged under the back second light guide plate 3160. The light guide plate LED3172a is made to emit light, and the sixth pattern 3162 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of broken and scattered glass pieces as the sixth pattern 3162 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are sequentially luminescent and decorated with patterns related to each other to move like an animation. It is possible to produce light emission. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the light emitting decoration is in the order of the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160. By making (light emission display), it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect with a movement such that the broken glass pieces are scattered after the transparent glass is cracked. At this time, since the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged rearward in this order, the broken glass pieces are scattered backward when viewed from the player side. It is possible to show a continuous luminescent decoration with a three-dimensional effect, which can entertain the player.

As a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 In the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decoration body 3320 is moved from the normal initial state to the position of the second state in which the back right movable decoration body 3320 is imitated, and the front side is swung down. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2610 in front view are made to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is light-emitting and decorated. In this state, as shown in the figure, the central portion of the radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back right movable decoration 3320 behind the pupil portion of the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Is located. Then, in this state, when the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 is made to emit light, the pupil of the first pattern 2621 that is emitted and displayed shines so as to shine, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to surprise the player and make him think that an advantageous game state such as "big hit game" may occur, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. The effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above is provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, although detailed illustration is omitted. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watch dock timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. Detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, the first receiving entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving entrance 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening sensor 2403. After that, the detection signals from the second inlet sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second inlet 2008, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are the main controls I, respectively. Input via the / O port.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals to the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416. The drive signal can be output, and the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol display, first special hold number indicator, second of the function display unit 1400 can be output from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a special symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, etc.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor 2405 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the big winning opening sensor 2403, first The detection of the game ball B by the reception sensor 2404 and the second reception sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor 2405 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201) and starting the ball removal operation. ..

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The decorative body detection sensor 3154 and slide detection sensor 3154 of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, the movable position detection sensor of the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400 and the back lower effect unit 3500. Detection signals from various detection sensors such as a detection sensor for detecting the position of the movable decorative body are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is used as a received game board side lighting / blinking command. Based on this, a lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 1720 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. And so on.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data on the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously driven per minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , It is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is in the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is displayed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction no hit", "second big hit (for example, per accessory)", and the like.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the result of the special lottery that causes an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), and the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "per accessory", the first entrance for a predetermined time after the large winning opening 2005 enables the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined pattern. When the game ball B is accepted into the 2007 (V winning opening) and the game ball B is received at the first entrance 2007, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time for suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, back unit 3000, back effect unit 3100, and back inside. It is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, etc. by appropriately using the production unit 3200, the back right production unit 3300, the back top production unit 3400, the back bottom production unit 3500, the back front production unit 3600, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by the production, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. 2600, back-to-back effect unit 3100, back-to-back effect unit 3200, back-right effect unit 3300, back-up effect unit 3400, back-to-back effect unit 3500, back-front effect unit 3600, etc. , Movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment is used for the effect display means of the present invention, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the present embodiment is used for the movable decorative body of the present invention. The lock spring 3143 corresponds to the lock urging means of the present invention, and the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 in the present embodiment corresponds to the moving means and the rotating means of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic action and effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is in the standby position, the rear end of the game area 5a is divided. Through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the effect display device 1600 for displaying the effect image is located in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and the effect display device is located in the upper part in front of the effect display device 1600. A large back-rear movable decorative body 3120 of a large back-rear effect unit 3100 extending so as to straddle the display screen of 1600 in the left-right direction is located. In this state, the lock member 3141 is in the locked position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the regulation portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 from above. The movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side of 3141c is restricted. Further, the lock member 3141 is urged from the release position side to the lock position side by the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the stopper 3141e abuts on the rotation restricting member 3144 to move from the lock position to the release position. Is restricted from rotating to the opposite side.

Then, the lock member 3141 is locked by the downward movement of the slide guide 3134 driven by the rear-rear drive motor 3135 of the rear-rear movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. When rotating from the back to the release position, the regulating portion 3141c moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and the gravity acting on the back-rear movable decoration 3120 causes the effect display device. It falls (moves) to the lower moving end (lowering position) so as to traverse the front of the 1600. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward after the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 has fallen, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. After that, when the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is moved upward by the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 to lock. The member 3141 rotates toward the release position, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 can move upward to a position beyond the regulation portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 moves upward from the lock member 3141, the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 is viewed from the front. It will return to the state of being located at the upper part in the game area 5a.

In this way, when the lock member 3141 is moved from the lock position to the release position by the transmission slider 3142 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state, a large back rear movable decorative body that straddles the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. Since the 3120 will fall (move) so as to traverse the front side of the effect display device 1600, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the player can see it. The movement of the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 can be noticed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decoration body 3120. In addition, the large back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can give a strong impact to the player by dropping, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the game can be played. It is possible to strongly make the person think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

By the way, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction and both ends in the left-right direction are movably attached by the slide shafts 3132, the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 Is more likely to tilt in the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is unlocked by the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 is on the opposite side to the downward direction in which the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is going to move. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move upward of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120, making it difficult for the lock protrusion 3122a to come off from the regulation portion 3141c. As a result, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is tilted, the lock protrusion 3122a does not come off from the regulation portion 3141c, and it is possible to prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 from falling downward without permission. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 from falling without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 from falling without permission. At the same time, the lock can be released at a desired timing according to the game state to drop the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and the effect of the movable effect using the back-rear movable decoration 3120 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the effect image as well, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Can be done. Further, by displaying the effect image that matches the movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image, a collaboration effect (for example) between the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 and the effect image is displayed. , The effect that the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, the effect that the character is moved by the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, etc.) can be performed. A variety of productions make it difficult for players to get bored and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is unlocked, the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the regulating portion 3141c moves upward, so that the effect display device 1600 is used. By making the back-rear movable decoration 3120 straddle in the left-right direction, even if the weight of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 increases, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is released from the regulation portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, one lock member 3141 can sufficiently lock the back-rear movable decorative body 3120. Further, since only one lock member 3141 is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing a plurality of lock members 3141 as compared with the case where a plurality of lock members 3141 are provided, and the lock member 3141 is provided. The space can be made as small as possible, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the regulating portion 3141c (standby position) to the lower moving end (lowering position). The distance can be as long as possible. Therefore, when the back-rear movable decoration 3120 falls a long distance, the player's interest can be easily attracted to the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, there is a certain distance (space) between the lock member 3141 (regulating portion 3141c) and the upper moving end. ) Is secured, so that when the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, it is possible to secure a space in which the regulating portion 3141c can move upward, and the lock can be secured. The member 3141 can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the lock member 3141 can lock or unlock the movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is provided with a guide portion 3141d extending diagonally, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved upward and returned to the original position, it is locked by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. Even if the member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side, the lock protrusion 3122a abuts on the guide portion 3141d as the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 moves, so that the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated to the release position side. Can be moved. Therefore, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is returned to the original state, it is not necessary to control the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, and the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, resulting in an overload. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to entertain due to the instability of the production control and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the rotation of the lock member 3141 to the rotation restricting member 3144 by the stopper 3141e is restricted from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position, the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the regulation portion 3141c at the lock position. Even if a strong force acts downward from the lock protrusion 3122a side of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the side opposite to the release position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 Can be prevented from coming off the regulation portion 3141c, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be surely prevented from falling without permission.

Further, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the drive of the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, and the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and then the back-rear movable. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back-rear drive motor 3135 in order to return the decorative body 3120 to its original state, the lock member 3141 automatically rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, after the lock is released by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is dropped, the lock member 3141 is returned to the lock position by the lock spring 3143 without being returned to the lock position by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. be able to. Therefore, it is not necessary to drive (control) the rear-rear drive motor 3135 of the rear-rear movable mechanism 3130 just to return the lock member 3141 to the lock position (original state), so that the load on the effect control can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained by the instability of the production control due to the overload and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved (falls) downward by the gravity that is constantly acting, it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 downward. Instead, the configuration related to the movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be simplified, the configuration related to the movement can be made compact, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made as much as the compact space. It is possible to make it larger, and it is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stand out and strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is provided to move the back-rear movable decoration 3120 upward, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 can be dropped by the lock member 3141 and the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. It becomes possible to prevent it. That is, since the lock member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 can be doubly locked, there is a problem that the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 falls to the lower moving end without permission. It can be prevented, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a movable decorative body on which a force for constantly moving to one side in the moving direction is acting, a force for constantly moving downward due to gravity is acting on the back. Although the movable decorative body 3120 is shown, it is not limited to this, and it is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and a force that constantly tries to move to one side in the moving direction by the urging force of the elastic member. It may be a movable decorative body on which is acting, or it may be a movable decorative body that is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction and has a force acting to constantly move it upward by the urging force of the elastic member. good.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1600 Effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back rear movable production unit 3120 Back rear movable decoration (movable decoration)
3122 Left slider 3122a Lock protrusion 3130 Back rear movable mechanism (rotating means, moving means)
3132 Slide shaft 3133 Spiral shaft (rotating means, moving means)
3134 Slide guide (rotating means, moving means)
3134a Guide body 3134b Guide protrusion 3135 Rear rear drive motor (rotating means, moving means)
3141 Lock member 3141a Main body 3141b Bearing hole 3141c Regulation 3141d Guide 3141e Stopper 3141f Transmission protrusion 3141g Transmission slot 3142 Transmission slider (rotating means)
3142a Transmission pin 3142b Release contact part 3142c Locking part 3143 Lock spring (lock urging means)
3144 Rotation control member

Claims (1)

A storage unit that is provided in the upper part on the back side of the game machine and has a storage area that can store game balls supplied from the island facility.
A tank rail portion capable of guiding the game ball stored in the storage area toward the right side of the rear view of the game machine, and
In a game machine equipped with
A partition wall portion that partitions the upper opening of the storage area and
A non-reservoir area formed outside the upper opening partitioned by the partition wall,
Prepare
The non-storage area portion is formed on the right side of the partition wall portion, and is formed.
A specific inclined surface capable of guiding the game ball toward the tank rail portion is formed in the non-storage region portion so that the game ball located in the non-storage region portion can flow into the tank rail portion by a predetermined event. A game machine characterized by being made .